1 |
417 |
julius |
% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
|
2 |
|
|
%
|
3 |
|
|
% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
|
4 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
|
5 |
|
|
%
|
6 |
|
|
\def\texinfoversion{2009-05-16.16}
|
7 |
|
|
%
|
8 |
|
|
% Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
|
9 |
|
|
% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006,
|
10 |
|
|
% 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
11 |
|
|
%
|
12 |
|
|
% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
|
13 |
|
|
% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
|
14 |
|
|
% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the
|
15 |
|
|
% License, or (at your option) any later version.
|
16 |
|
|
%
|
17 |
|
|
% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
|
18 |
|
|
% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
|
19 |
|
|
% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
|
20 |
|
|
% General Public License for more details.
|
21 |
|
|
%
|
22 |
|
|
% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
|
23 |
|
|
% along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
|
24 |
|
|
%
|
25 |
|
|
% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
|
26 |
|
|
% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
|
27 |
|
|
% restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.)
|
28 |
|
|
%
|
29 |
|
|
% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
|
30 |
|
|
% reports; you can get the latest version from:
|
31 |
|
|
% http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or
|
32 |
|
|
% ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
|
33 |
|
|
% (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org).
|
34 |
|
|
% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
|
35 |
|
|
% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
|
36 |
|
|
%
|
37 |
|
|
% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a
|
38 |
|
|
% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
|
39 |
|
|
% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
|
40 |
|
|
%
|
41 |
|
|
% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
|
42 |
|
|
% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
|
43 |
|
|
% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
|
44 |
|
|
% tex foo.texi
|
45 |
|
|
% texindex foo.??
|
46 |
|
|
% tex foo.texi
|
47 |
|
|
% tex foo.texi
|
48 |
|
|
% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
|
49 |
|
|
% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
|
50 |
|
|
% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
|
51 |
|
|
% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
|
52 |
|
|
%
|
53 |
|
|
% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
|
54 |
|
|
% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the
|
55 |
|
|
% full Texinfo distribution.
|
56 |
|
|
%
|
57 |
|
|
% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
|
58 |
|
|
|
59 |
|
|
|
60 |
|
|
\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
|
61 |
|
|
|
62 |
|
|
% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
|
63 |
|
|
% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
|
64 |
|
|
% they might have appeared in the input file name.
|
65 |
|
|
\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
|
66 |
|
|
\catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
|
67 |
|
|
|
68 |
|
|
|
69 |
|
|
\chardef\other=12
|
70 |
|
|
|
71 |
|
|
% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
|
72 |
|
|
% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
|
73 |
|
|
\let\+ = \relax
|
74 |
|
|
|
75 |
|
|
% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
|
76 |
|
|
\let\ptexb=\b
|
77 |
|
|
\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
|
78 |
|
|
\let\ptexc=\c
|
79 |
|
|
\let\ptexcomma=\,
|
80 |
|
|
\let\ptexdot=\.
|
81 |
|
|
\let\ptexdots=\dots
|
82 |
|
|
\let\ptexend=\end
|
83 |
|
|
\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
|
84 |
|
|
\let\ptexexclam=\!
|
85 |
|
|
\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
|
86 |
|
|
\let\ptexgtr=>
|
87 |
|
|
\let\ptexhat=^
|
88 |
|
|
\let\ptexi=\i
|
89 |
|
|
\let\ptexindent=\indent
|
90 |
|
|
\let\ptexinsert=\insert
|
91 |
|
|
\let\ptexlbrace=\{
|
92 |
|
|
\let\ptexless=<
|
93 |
|
|
\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
|
94 |
|
|
\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
|
95 |
|
|
\let\ptexplus=+
|
96 |
|
|
\let\ptexrbrace=\}
|
97 |
|
|
\let\ptexslash=\/
|
98 |
|
|
\let\ptexstar=\*
|
99 |
|
|
\let\ptext=\t
|
100 |
|
|
\let\ptextop=\top
|
101 |
|
|
{\catcode`\'=\active
|
102 |
|
|
\global\let\ptexquoteright'}% Math-mode def from plain.tex.
|
103 |
|
|
\let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright
|
104 |
|
|
|
105 |
|
|
% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
|
106 |
|
|
% starts a new line in the output.
|
107 |
|
|
\newlinechar = `^^J
|
108 |
|
|
|
109 |
|
|
% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
|
110 |
|
|
% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
|
111 |
|
|
%
|
112 |
|
|
\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
|
113 |
|
|
\let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
|
114 |
|
|
\else
|
115 |
|
|
\def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
|
116 |
|
|
\fi
|
117 |
|
|
|
118 |
|
|
% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
|
119 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
|
120 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
|
121 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
|
122 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
|
123 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
|
124 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
|
125 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
|
126 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
|
127 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
|
128 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
|
129 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
|
130 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
|
131 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
|
132 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
|
133 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
|
134 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
|
135 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
|
136 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
|
137 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
|
138 |
|
|
%
|
139 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
|
140 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
|
141 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
|
142 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
|
143 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
|
144 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
|
145 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
|
146 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
|
147 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
|
148 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
|
149 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
|
150 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
|
151 |
|
|
%
|
152 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
|
153 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
|
154 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
|
155 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
|
156 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
|
157 |
|
|
|
158 |
|
|
% Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful.
|
159 |
|
|
\chardef\spacecat = 10
|
160 |
|
|
\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat}
|
161 |
|
|
|
162 |
|
|
% sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences.
|
163 |
|
|
\chardef\colonChar = `\:
|
164 |
|
|
\chardef\commaChar = `\,
|
165 |
|
|
\chardef\dashChar = `\-
|
166 |
|
|
\chardef\dotChar = `\.
|
167 |
|
|
\chardef\exclamChar= `\!
|
168 |
|
|
\chardef\lquoteChar= `\`
|
169 |
|
|
\chardef\questChar = `\?
|
170 |
|
|
\chardef\rquoteChar= `\'
|
171 |
|
|
\chardef\semiChar = `\;
|
172 |
|
|
\chardef\underChar = `\_
|
173 |
|
|
|
174 |
|
|
% Ignore a token.
|
175 |
|
|
%
|
176 |
|
|
\def\gobble#1{}
|
177 |
|
|
|
178 |
|
|
% The following is used inside several \edef's.
|
179 |
|
|
\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
|
180 |
|
|
|
181 |
|
|
% Hyphenation fixes.
|
182 |
|
|
\hyphenation{
|
183 |
|
|
Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
|
184 |
|
|
ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
|
185 |
|
|
data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
|
186 |
|
|
man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
|
187 |
|
|
par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
|
188 |
|
|
spell-ing spell-ings
|
189 |
|
|
stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
|
190 |
|
|
wide-spread wrap-around
|
191 |
|
|
}
|
192 |
|
|
|
193 |
|
|
% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
|
194 |
|
|
\newdimen\bindingoffset
|
195 |
|
|
\newdimen\normaloffset
|
196 |
|
|
\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
|
197 |
|
|
|
198 |
|
|
% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
|
199 |
|
|
% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
|
200 |
|
|
% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
|
201 |
|
|
%
|
202 |
|
|
\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
|
203 |
|
|
|
204 |
|
|
% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
|
205 |
|
|
% surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
|
206 |
|
|
% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
|
207 |
|
|
% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
|
208 |
|
|
% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
|
209 |
|
|
%
|
210 |
|
|
\def\|{%
|
211 |
|
|
% \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
|
212 |
|
|
\leavevmode
|
213 |
|
|
%
|
214 |
|
|
% Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
|
215 |
|
|
\vadjust{%
|
216 |
|
|
% We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
|
217 |
|
|
% leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
|
218 |
|
|
\vskip-\baselineskip
|
219 |
|
|
%
|
220 |
|
|
% \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
|
221 |
|
|
% the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
|
222 |
|
|
\llap{%
|
223 |
|
|
%
|
224 |
|
|
% For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
|
225 |
|
|
\vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
|
226 |
|
|
%
|
227 |
|
|
% This is the space between the bar and the text.
|
228 |
|
|
\hskip 12pt
|
229 |
|
|
}%
|
230 |
|
|
}%
|
231 |
|
|
}
|
232 |
|
|
|
233 |
|
|
% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
|
234 |
|
|
% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
|
235 |
|
|
% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make
|
236 |
|
|
% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
|
237 |
|
|
% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
|
238 |
|
|
%
|
239 |
|
|
\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
|
240 |
|
|
\def\loggingall{%
|
241 |
|
|
\tracingstats2
|
242 |
|
|
\tracingpages1
|
243 |
|
|
\tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex
|
244 |
|
|
\tracingparagraphs1
|
245 |
|
|
\tracingoutput1
|
246 |
|
|
\tracingmacros2
|
247 |
|
|
\tracingrestores1
|
248 |
|
|
\showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
|
249 |
|
|
\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging
|
250 |
|
|
\tracingscantokens1
|
251 |
|
|
\tracingifs1
|
252 |
|
|
\tracinggroups1
|
253 |
|
|
\tracingnesting2
|
254 |
|
|
\tracingassigns1
|
255 |
|
|
\fi
|
256 |
|
|
\tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex
|
257 |
|
|
\errorcontextlines16
|
258 |
|
|
}%
|
259 |
|
|
|
260 |
|
|
% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing
|
261 |
|
|
% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
|
262 |
|
|
%
|
263 |
|
|
\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
|
264 |
|
|
\removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
|
265 |
|
|
\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
|
266 |
|
|
\removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
|
267 |
|
|
\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
|
268 |
|
|
\removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
|
269 |
|
|
|
270 |
|
|
% For @cropmarks command.
|
271 |
|
|
% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
|
272 |
|
|
%
|
273 |
|
|
\newif\ifcropmarks
|
274 |
|
|
\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
|
275 |
|
|
%
|
276 |
|
|
% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
|
277 |
|
|
% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
|
278 |
|
|
%
|
279 |
|
|
\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
|
280 |
|
|
\newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc
|
281 |
|
|
\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
|
282 |
|
|
\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
|
283 |
|
|
|
284 |
|
|
% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor.
|
285 |
|
|
% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark.
|
286 |
|
|
% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark.
|
287 |
|
|
%
|
288 |
|
|
% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct.
|
289 |
|
|
% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase.
|
290 |
|
|
%
|
291 |
|
|
% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter
|
292 |
|
|
% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top
|
293 |
|
|
% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. The solution is
|
294 |
|
|
% described on page 260 of The TeXbook. It involves outputting two
|
295 |
|
|
% marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and
|
296 |
|
|
% one after. I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK...
|
297 |
|
|
\def\domark{%
|
298 |
|
|
\toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}%
|
299 |
|
|
\toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}%
|
300 |
|
|
\toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}%
|
301 |
|
|
\toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}%
|
302 |
|
|
\toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}%
|
303 |
|
|
\mark{%
|
304 |
|
|
\the\toks0 \the\toks2
|
305 |
|
|
\noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6
|
306 |
|
|
\noexpand\else \the\toks8
|
307 |
|
|
}%
|
308 |
|
|
}
|
309 |
|
|
% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title
|
310 |
|
|
% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us
|
311 |
|
|
% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g.,
|
312 |
|
|
% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very
|
313 |
|
|
% first @chapter.
|
314 |
|
|
\def\gettopheadingmarks{%
|
315 |
|
|
\ifcase0\topmark\fi
|
316 |
|
|
\ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi
|
317 |
|
|
}
|
318 |
|
|
\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi}
|
319 |
|
|
\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi}
|
320 |
|
|
|
321 |
|
|
% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors.
|
322 |
|
|
\def\lastchapterdefs{}
|
323 |
|
|
\def\lastsectiondefs{}
|
324 |
|
|
\def\prevchapterdefs{}
|
325 |
|
|
\def\prevsectiondefs{}
|
326 |
|
|
\def\lastcolordefs{}
|
327 |
|
|
|
328 |
|
|
% Main output routine.
|
329 |
|
|
\chardef\PAGE = 255
|
330 |
|
|
\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
|
331 |
|
|
|
332 |
|
|
\newbox\headlinebox
|
333 |
|
|
\newbox\footlinebox
|
334 |
|
|
|
335 |
|
|
% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents
|
336 |
|
|
% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
|
337 |
|
|
\def\onepageout#1{%
|
338 |
|
|
\ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
|
339 |
|
|
%
|
340 |
|
|
\ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
|
341 |
|
|
\else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
|
342 |
|
|
%
|
343 |
|
|
% Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
|
344 |
|
|
% the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
|
345 |
|
|
\ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
|
346 |
|
|
\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
|
347 |
|
|
\ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi
|
348 |
|
|
\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
|
349 |
|
|
%
|
350 |
|
|
{%
|
351 |
|
|
% Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
|
352 |
|
|
% take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
|
353 |
|
|
% before the \shipout runs.
|
354 |
|
|
%
|
355 |
|
|
\indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
|
356 |
|
|
\normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
|
357 |
|
|
% the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
|
358 |
|
|
% We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this:
|
359 |
|
|
% \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}}
|
360 |
|
|
% "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in;
|
361 |
|
|
% it needs to be
|
362 |
|
|
% {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym}
|
363 |
|
|
\shipout\vbox{%
|
364 |
|
|
% Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
|
365 |
|
|
\ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
|
366 |
|
|
%
|
367 |
|
|
\ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
|
368 |
|
|
\hsize = \outerhsize
|
369 |
|
|
\vskip-\topandbottommargin
|
370 |
|
|
\vtop to0pt{%
|
371 |
|
|
\line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
|
372 |
|
|
\nointerlineskip
|
373 |
|
|
\line{%
|
374 |
|
|
\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
|
375 |
|
|
\hfill
|
376 |
|
|
\vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
|
377 |
|
|
}%
|
378 |
|
|
\vss}%
|
379 |
|
|
\vskip\topandbottommargin
|
380 |
|
|
\line\bgroup
|
381 |
|
|
\hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
|
382 |
|
|
\ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
|
383 |
|
|
\vbox\bgroup
|
384 |
|
|
\fi
|
385 |
|
|
%
|
386 |
|
|
\unvbox\headlinebox
|
387 |
|
|
\pagebody{#1}%
|
388 |
|
|
\ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
|
389 |
|
|
% Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
|
390 |
|
|
% (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.)
|
391 |
|
|
% The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
|
392 |
|
|
\vskip 24pt
|
393 |
|
|
\unvbox\footlinebox
|
394 |
|
|
\fi
|
395 |
|
|
%
|
396 |
|
|
\ifcropmarks
|
397 |
|
|
\egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
|
398 |
|
|
\hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
|
399 |
|
|
\vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
|
400 |
|
|
\boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
|
401 |
|
|
\vbox to0pt{\vss
|
402 |
|
|
\line{%
|
403 |
|
|
\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
|
404 |
|
|
\hfill
|
405 |
|
|
\vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
|
406 |
|
|
}%
|
407 |
|
|
\nointerlineskip
|
408 |
|
|
\line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
|
409 |
|
|
}%
|
410 |
|
|
\egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
|
411 |
|
|
\fi
|
412 |
|
|
}% end of \shipout\vbox
|
413 |
|
|
}% end of group with \indexdummies
|
414 |
|
|
\advancepageno
|
415 |
|
|
\ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
|
416 |
|
|
}
|
417 |
|
|
|
418 |
|
|
\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
|
419 |
|
|
|
420 |
|
|
\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
|
421 |
|
|
{\catcode`\@ =11
|
422 |
|
|
\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
|
423 |
|
|
% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
|
424 |
|
|
\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
|
425 |
|
|
\rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
|
426 |
|
|
\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax
|
427 |
|
|
\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
|
428 |
|
|
\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
|
429 |
|
|
}
|
430 |
|
|
|
431 |
|
|
% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are
|
432 |
|
|
% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
|
433 |
|
|
% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
|
434 |
|
|
%
|
435 |
|
|
\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
|
436 |
|
|
\def\nstop{\vbox
|
437 |
|
|
{\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
|
438 |
|
|
\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
|
439 |
|
|
\def\nsbot{\vbox
|
440 |
|
|
{\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
|
441 |
|
|
|
442 |
|
|
% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
|
443 |
|
|
% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
|
444 |
|
|
% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
|
445 |
|
|
%
|
446 |
|
|
\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
|
447 |
|
|
\def\parseargusing#1#2{%
|
448 |
|
|
\def\argtorun{#2}%
|
449 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
450 |
|
|
\obeylines
|
451 |
|
|
\spaceisspace
|
452 |
|
|
#1%
|
453 |
|
|
\parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
|
454 |
|
|
}
|
455 |
|
|
|
456 |
|
|
{\obeylines %
|
457 |
|
|
\gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
|
458 |
|
|
\endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
|
459 |
|
|
\argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
|
460 |
|
|
}%
|
461 |
|
|
}
|
462 |
|
|
|
463 |
|
|
% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
|
464 |
|
|
\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
|
465 |
|
|
\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
|
466 |
|
|
|
467 |
|
|
% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
|
468 |
|
|
%
|
469 |
|
|
% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
|
470 |
|
|
% @end itemize @c foo
|
471 |
|
|
% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
|
472 |
|
|
% by \finishparsearg.
|
473 |
|
|
%
|
474 |
|
|
\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
|
475 |
|
|
\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
|
476 |
|
|
\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
|
477 |
|
|
\def\temp{#3}%
|
478 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\empty
|
479 |
|
|
% Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp:
|
480 |
|
|
\let\temp\finishparsearg
|
481 |
|
|
\else
|
482 |
|
|
\let\temp\argcheckspaces
|
483 |
|
|
\fi
|
484 |
|
|
% Put the space token in:
|
485 |
|
|
\temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
|
486 |
|
|
}
|
487 |
|
|
|
488 |
|
|
% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
|
489 |
|
|
% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
|
490 |
|
|
% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
|
491 |
|
|
% just before passing the control to \argtorun.
|
492 |
|
|
% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
|
493 |
|
|
% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
|
494 |
|
|
% that a pair of braces would be stripped.
|
495 |
|
|
%
|
496 |
|
|
% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
|
497 |
|
|
%
|
498 |
|
|
\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
|
499 |
|
|
|
500 |
|
|
% \parseargdef\foo{...}
|
501 |
|
|
% is roughly equivalent to
|
502 |
|
|
% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
|
503 |
|
|
% \def\Xfoo#1{...}
|
504 |
|
|
%
|
505 |
|
|
% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
|
506 |
|
|
% favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03
|
507 |
|
|
|
508 |
|
|
\def\parseargdef#1{%
|
509 |
|
|
\expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
|
510 |
|
|
}
|
511 |
|
|
\def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
|
512 |
|
|
\def#2{\parsearg#1}%
|
513 |
|
|
\def#1##1%
|
514 |
|
|
}
|
515 |
|
|
|
516 |
|
|
% Several utility definitions with active space:
|
517 |
|
|
{
|
518 |
|
|
\obeyspaces
|
519 |
|
|
\gdef\obeyedspace{ }
|
520 |
|
|
|
521 |
|
|
% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
|
522 |
|
|
% space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
|
523 |
|
|
% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
|
524 |
|
|
% should produce a line of output anyway.
|
525 |
|
|
%
|
526 |
|
|
\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
|
527 |
|
|
|
528 |
|
|
% If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
|
529 |
|
|
% therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
|
530 |
|
|
% expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
|
531 |
|
|
\gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
|
532 |
|
|
}
|
533 |
|
|
|
534 |
|
|
|
535 |
|
|
\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
|
536 |
|
|
|
537 |
|
|
% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this:
|
538 |
|
|
%
|
539 |
|
|
% \envdef\foo{...}
|
540 |
|
|
% \def\Efoo{...}
|
541 |
|
|
%
|
542 |
|
|
% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
|
543 |
|
|
% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also
|
544 |
|
|
% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
|
545 |
|
|
% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be
|
546 |
|
|
% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
|
547 |
|
|
%
|
548 |
|
|
% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
|
549 |
|
|
% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The
|
550 |
|
|
% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
|
551 |
|
|
% special case.)
|
552 |
|
|
|
553 |
|
|
|
554 |
|
|
% At run-time, environments start with this:
|
555 |
|
|
\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
|
556 |
|
|
% initialize
|
557 |
|
|
\let\thisenv\empty
|
558 |
|
|
|
559 |
|
|
% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
|
560 |
|
|
\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
|
561 |
|
|
\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
|
562 |
|
|
|
563 |
|
|
% Check whether we're in the right environment:
|
564 |
|
|
\def\checkenv#1{%
|
565 |
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
566 |
|
|
\ifx\thisenv\temp
|
567 |
|
|
\else
|
568 |
|
|
\badenverr
|
569 |
|
|
\fi
|
570 |
|
|
}
|
571 |
|
|
|
572 |
|
|
% Environment mismatch, #1 expected:
|
573 |
|
|
\def\badenverr{%
|
574 |
|
|
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
575 |
|
|
\errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
|
576 |
|
|
not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
|
577 |
|
|
}
|
578 |
|
|
\def\inenvironment#1{%
|
579 |
|
|
\ifx#1\empty
|
580 |
|
|
out of any environment%
|
581 |
|
|
\else
|
582 |
|
|
in environment \expandafter\string#1%
|
583 |
|
|
\fi
|
584 |
|
|
}
|
585 |
|
|
|
586 |
|
|
% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
|
587 |
|
|
% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
|
588 |
|
|
%
|
589 |
|
|
\parseargdef\end{%
|
590 |
|
|
\if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
|
591 |
|
|
\else
|
592 |
|
|
% The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03
|
593 |
|
|
\expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
|
594 |
|
|
\csname E#1\endcsname
|
595 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
596 |
|
|
\fi
|
597 |
|
|
}
|
598 |
|
|
|
599 |
|
|
\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
|
600 |
|
|
|
601 |
|
|
|
602 |
|
|
%% Simple single-character @ commands
|
603 |
|
|
|
604 |
|
|
% @@ prints an @
|
605 |
|
|
% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
|
606 |
|
|
\def\@{{\tt\char64}}
|
607 |
|
|
|
608 |
|
|
% This is turned off because it was never documented
|
609 |
|
|
% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
|
610 |
|
|
%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
|
611 |
|
|
%% but suppressing ligatures.
|
612 |
|
|
%\def\`{{`}}
|
613 |
|
|
%\def\'{{'}}
|
614 |
|
|
|
615 |
|
|
% Used to generate quoted braces.
|
616 |
|
|
\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
|
617 |
|
|
\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
|
618 |
|
|
\let\{=\mylbrace
|
619 |
|
|
\let\}=\myrbrace
|
620 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
621 |
|
|
% Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
|
622 |
|
|
% and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
|
623 |
|
|
\catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
|
624 |
|
|
\catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
|
625 |
|
|
\catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
|
626 |
|
|
!gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
|
627 |
|
|
!gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
|
628 |
|
|
!gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
|
629 |
|
|
!gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
|
630 |
|
|
!endgroup
|
631 |
|
|
|
632 |
|
|
% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
|
633 |
|
|
\let\comma = ,
|
634 |
|
|
|
635 |
|
|
% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
|
636 |
|
|
% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
|
637 |
|
|
\let\, = \c
|
638 |
|
|
\let\dotaccent = \.
|
639 |
|
|
\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
|
640 |
|
|
\let\tieaccent = \t
|
641 |
|
|
\let\ubaraccent = \b
|
642 |
|
|
\let\udotaccent = \d
|
643 |
|
|
|
644 |
|
|
% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
|
645 |
|
|
% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
|
646 |
|
|
\def\questiondown{?`}
|
647 |
|
|
\def\exclamdown{!`}
|
648 |
|
|
\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
|
649 |
|
|
\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
|
650 |
|
|
|
651 |
|
|
% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
|
652 |
|
|
\def\imacro{i}
|
653 |
|
|
\def\jmacro{j}
|
654 |
|
|
\def\dotless#1{%
|
655 |
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
656 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi
|
657 |
|
|
\else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi
|
658 |
|
|
\else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
|
659 |
|
|
\fi\fi
|
660 |
|
|
}
|
661 |
|
|
|
662 |
|
|
% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
|
663 |
|
|
% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.)
|
664 |
|
|
%
|
665 |
|
|
\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
|
666 |
|
|
|
667 |
|
|
% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in
|
668 |
|
|
% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
|
669 |
|
|
% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
|
670 |
|
|
% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
|
671 |
|
|
% \scriptscriptstyle).
|
672 |
|
|
%
|
673 |
|
|
\def\LaTeX{%
|
674 |
|
|
L\kern-.36em
|
675 |
|
|
{\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
|
676 |
|
|
\vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}%
|
677 |
|
|
\kern-.15em
|
678 |
|
|
\TeX
|
679 |
|
|
}
|
680 |
|
|
|
681 |
|
|
% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
|
682 |
|
|
% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
|
683 |
|
|
% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
|
684 |
|
|
% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
|
685 |
|
|
% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
|
686 |
|
|
{\catcode`@ = 11
|
687 |
|
|
% Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
|
688 |
|
|
% if the definition is written into an index file.
|
689 |
|
|
\global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
|
690 |
|
|
\gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
|
691 |
|
|
}
|
692 |
|
|
|
693 |
|
|
% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
|
694 |
|
|
\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
|
695 |
|
|
|
696 |
|
|
% @* forces a line break.
|
697 |
|
|
\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
|
698 |
|
|
|
699 |
|
|
% @/ allows a line break.
|
700 |
|
|
\let\/=\allowbreak
|
701 |
|
|
|
702 |
|
|
% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
|
703 |
|
|
\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
|
704 |
|
|
|
705 |
|
|
% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
|
706 |
|
|
\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
|
707 |
|
|
|
708 |
|
|
% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
|
709 |
|
|
\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
|
710 |
|
|
|
711 |
|
|
% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
|
712 |
|
|
%
|
713 |
|
|
\def\onword{on}
|
714 |
|
|
\def\offword{off}
|
715 |
|
|
%
|
716 |
|
|
\parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
|
717 |
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
718 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
|
719 |
|
|
\else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
|
720 |
|
|
\else
|
721 |
|
|
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
722 |
|
|
\errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}%
|
723 |
|
|
\fi\fi
|
724 |
|
|
}
|
725 |
|
|
|
726 |
|
|
% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
|
727 |
|
|
% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
|
728 |
|
|
% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
|
729 |
|
|
\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
|
730 |
|
|
|
731 |
|
|
% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
|
732 |
|
|
% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
|
733 |
|
|
% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
|
734 |
|
|
% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
|
735 |
|
|
% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
|
736 |
|
|
% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
|
737 |
|
|
% the text is small, which looks bad.
|
738 |
|
|
%
|
739 |
|
|
% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can
|
740 |
|
|
% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
|
741 |
|
|
% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an
|
742 |
|
|
% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The
|
743 |
|
|
% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
|
744 |
|
|
% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
|
745 |
|
|
%
|
746 |
|
|
\newbox\groupbox
|
747 |
|
|
\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
|
748 |
|
|
%
|
749 |
|
|
\envdef\group{%
|
750 |
|
|
\ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
|
751 |
|
|
\errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
|
752 |
|
|
\errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
|
753 |
|
|
\fi
|
754 |
|
|
\startsavinginserts
|
755 |
|
|
%
|
756 |
|
|
\setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
|
757 |
|
|
% Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
|
758 |
|
|
% @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
|
759 |
|
|
% end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
|
760 |
|
|
% the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
|
761 |
|
|
% should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
|
762 |
|
|
% manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
|
763 |
|
|
\comment
|
764 |
|
|
}
|
765 |
|
|
%
|
766 |
|
|
% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
|
767 |
|
|
% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
|
768 |
|
|
% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
|
769 |
|
|
% above. But it's pretty close.
|
770 |
|
|
\def\Egroup{%
|
771 |
|
|
% To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
|
772 |
|
|
% and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
|
773 |
|
|
\endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
|
774 |
|
|
\global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
|
775 |
|
|
\egroup % End the \vtop.
|
776 |
|
|
% \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
|
777 |
|
|
\dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
|
778 |
|
|
% \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
|
779 |
|
|
\dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
|
780 |
|
|
% if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
|
781 |
|
|
% group, force a page break.
|
782 |
|
|
\ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
|
783 |
|
|
\ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
|
784 |
|
|
\page
|
785 |
|
|
\fi
|
786 |
|
|
\fi
|
787 |
|
|
\box\groupbox
|
788 |
|
|
\prevdepth = \dimen1
|
789 |
|
|
\checkinserts
|
790 |
|
|
}
|
791 |
|
|
%
|
792 |
|
|
% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
|
793 |
|
|
% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
|
794 |
|
|
%
|
795 |
|
|
\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
|
796 |
|
|
group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
|
797 |
|
|
where each line of input produces a line of output.}
|
798 |
|
|
|
799 |
|
|
% @need space-in-mils
|
800 |
|
|
% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
|
801 |
|
|
|
802 |
|
|
\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
|
803 |
|
|
|
804 |
|
|
% Old definition--didn't work.
|
805 |
|
|
%\parseargdef\need{\par %
|
806 |
|
|
%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
|
807 |
|
|
%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
|
808 |
|
|
%{\baselineskip=0pt%
|
809 |
|
|
%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
|
810 |
|
|
%\prevdepth=-1000pt
|
811 |
|
|
%}}
|
812 |
|
|
|
813 |
|
|
\parseargdef\need{%
|
814 |
|
|
% Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
|
815 |
|
|
% paragraph.
|
816 |
|
|
\par
|
817 |
|
|
%
|
818 |
|
|
% If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
|
819 |
|
|
\dimen0 = #1\mil
|
820 |
|
|
\dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
|
821 |
|
|
\advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
|
822 |
|
|
\ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
|
823 |
|
|
%
|
824 |
|
|
% Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
|
825 |
|
|
% normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
|
826 |
|
|
% And a page break here is fine.
|
827 |
|
|
\vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
|
828 |
|
|
%
|
829 |
|
|
% TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
|
830 |
|
|
% main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
|
831 |
|
|
% empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
|
832 |
|
|
% page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
|
833 |
|
|
% page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
|
834 |
|
|
%
|
835 |
|
|
% There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
|
836 |
|
|
% page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
|
837 |
|
|
% sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
|
838 |
|
|
% almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
|
839 |
|
|
% good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
|
840 |
|
|
% example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
|
841 |
|
|
% document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
|
842 |
|
|
\penalty9999
|
843 |
|
|
%
|
844 |
|
|
% Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
|
845 |
|
|
\kern -#1\mil
|
846 |
|
|
%
|
847 |
|
|
% Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
|
848 |
|
|
\nobreak
|
849 |
|
|
\fi
|
850 |
|
|
}
|
851 |
|
|
|
852 |
|
|
% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
|
853 |
|
|
|
854 |
|
|
\let\br = \par
|
855 |
|
|
|
856 |
|
|
% @page forces the start of a new page.
|
857 |
|
|
%
|
858 |
|
|
\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
|
859 |
|
|
|
860 |
|
|
% @exdent text....
|
861 |
|
|
% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
|
862 |
|
|
|
863 |
|
|
% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
|
864 |
|
|
% That's how much \exdent should take out.
|
865 |
|
|
\newskip\exdentamount
|
866 |
|
|
|
867 |
|
|
% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
|
868 |
|
|
\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
|
869 |
|
|
|
870 |
|
|
% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
|
871 |
|
|
\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
|
872 |
|
|
\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
|
873 |
|
|
|
874 |
|
|
% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
|
875 |
|
|
% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
|
876 |
|
|
% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'.
|
877 |
|
|
%
|
878 |
|
|
\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
|
879 |
|
|
\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
|
880 |
|
|
%
|
881 |
|
|
\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
|
882 |
|
|
\nobreak
|
883 |
|
|
\kern-\strutdepth
|
884 |
|
|
\vtop to \strutdepth{%
|
885 |
|
|
\baselineskip=\strutdepth
|
886 |
|
|
\vss
|
887 |
|
|
% if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
|
888 |
|
|
% make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
|
889 |
|
|
\ifx#1l%
|
890 |
|
|
\llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
|
891 |
|
|
\else
|
892 |
|
|
\rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
|
893 |
|
|
\fi
|
894 |
|
|
\null
|
895 |
|
|
}%
|
896 |
|
|
}}
|
897 |
|
|
\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
|
898 |
|
|
\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
|
899 |
|
|
%
|
900 |
|
|
% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
|
901 |
|
|
% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
|
902 |
|
|
% else use TEXT for both).
|
903 |
|
|
%
|
904 |
|
|
\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
|
905 |
|
|
\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
|
906 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
907 |
|
|
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
|
908 |
|
|
\def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts
|
909 |
|
|
\def\righttext{#2}%
|
910 |
|
|
\else
|
911 |
|
|
\def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text
|
912 |
|
|
\def\righttext{#1}%
|
913 |
|
|
\fi
|
914 |
|
|
%
|
915 |
|
|
\ifodd\pageno
|
916 |
|
|
\def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
|
917 |
|
|
\else
|
918 |
|
|
\def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
|
919 |
|
|
\fi
|
920 |
|
|
\temp
|
921 |
|
|
}
|
922 |
|
|
|
923 |
|
|
% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE.
|
924 |
|
|
%
|
925 |
|
|
\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
|
926 |
|
|
\def\includezzz#1{%
|
927 |
|
|
\pushthisfilestack
|
928 |
|
|
\def\thisfile{#1}%
|
929 |
|
|
{%
|
930 |
|
|
\makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE.
|
931 |
|
|
\turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion
|
932 |
|
|
\indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
|
933 |
|
|
\edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }%
|
934 |
|
|
%
|
935 |
|
|
% This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes
|
936 |
|
|
% definitions, etc.
|
937 |
|
|
\expandafter
|
938 |
|
|
}\temp
|
939 |
|
|
\popthisfilestack
|
940 |
|
|
}
|
941 |
|
|
\def\filenamecatcodes{%
|
942 |
|
|
\catcode`\\=\other
|
943 |
|
|
\catcode`~=\other
|
944 |
|
|
\catcode`^=\other
|
945 |
|
|
\catcode`_=\other
|
946 |
|
|
\catcode`|=\other
|
947 |
|
|
\catcode`<=\other
|
948 |
|
|
\catcode`>=\other
|
949 |
|
|
\catcode`+=\other
|
950 |
|
|
\catcode`-=\other
|
951 |
|
|
\catcode`\`=\other
|
952 |
|
|
\catcode`\'=\other
|
953 |
|
|
}
|
954 |
|
|
|
955 |
|
|
\def\pushthisfilestack{%
|
956 |
|
|
\expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
|
957 |
|
|
}
|
958 |
|
|
\def\pushthisfilestackX{%
|
959 |
|
|
\expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
|
960 |
|
|
}
|
961 |
|
|
\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
|
962 |
|
|
\gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
|
963 |
|
|
}
|
964 |
|
|
|
965 |
|
|
\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
|
966 |
|
|
\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
|
967 |
|
|
the stack of filenames is empty.}}
|
968 |
|
|
|
969 |
|
|
\def\thisfile{}
|
970 |
|
|
|
971 |
|
|
% @center line
|
972 |
|
|
% outputs that line, centered.
|
973 |
|
|
%
|
974 |
|
|
\parseargdef\center{%
|
975 |
|
|
\ifhmode
|
976 |
|
|
\let\next\centerH
|
977 |
|
|
\else
|
978 |
|
|
\let\next\centerV
|
979 |
|
|
\fi
|
980 |
|
|
\next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
|
981 |
|
|
}
|
982 |
|
|
\def\centerH#1{%
|
983 |
|
|
{%
|
984 |
|
|
\hfil\break
|
985 |
|
|
\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
|
986 |
|
|
\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
|
987 |
|
|
\line{#1}%
|
988 |
|
|
\break
|
989 |
|
|
}%
|
990 |
|
|
}
|
991 |
|
|
\def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}}
|
992 |
|
|
|
993 |
|
|
% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
|
994 |
|
|
|
995 |
|
|
\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
|
996 |
|
|
|
997 |
|
|
% @comment ...line which is ignored...
|
998 |
|
|
% @c is the same as @comment
|
999 |
|
|
% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
|
1000 |
|
|
|
1001 |
|
|
\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
|
1002 |
|
|
\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
|
1003 |
|
|
\commentxxx}
|
1004 |
|
|
{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
|
1005 |
|
|
|
1006 |
|
|
\let\c=\comment
|
1007 |
|
|
|
1008 |
|
|
% @paragraphindent NCHARS
|
1009 |
|
|
% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
|
1010 |
|
|
% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
|
1011 |
|
|
% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
|
1012 |
|
|
%
|
1013 |
|
|
\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
|
1014 |
|
|
\def\noneword{none}
|
1015 |
|
|
%
|
1016 |
|
|
\parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
|
1017 |
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
1018 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\asisword
|
1019 |
|
|
\else
|
1020 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\noneword
|
1021 |
|
|
\defaultparindent = 0pt
|
1022 |
|
|
\else
|
1023 |
|
|
\defaultparindent = #1em
|
1024 |
|
|
\fi
|
1025 |
|
|
\fi
|
1026 |
|
|
\parindent = \defaultparindent
|
1027 |
|
|
}
|
1028 |
|
|
|
1029 |
|
|
% @exampleindent NCHARS
|
1030 |
|
|
% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
|
1031 |
|
|
% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
|
1032 |
|
|
% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
|
1033 |
|
|
\parseargdef\exampleindent{%
|
1034 |
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
1035 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\asisword
|
1036 |
|
|
\else
|
1037 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\noneword
|
1038 |
|
|
\lispnarrowing = 0pt
|
1039 |
|
|
\else
|
1040 |
|
|
\lispnarrowing = #1em
|
1041 |
|
|
\fi
|
1042 |
|
|
\fi
|
1043 |
|
|
}
|
1044 |
|
|
|
1045 |
|
|
% @firstparagraphindent WORD
|
1046 |
|
|
% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
|
1047 |
|
|
% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
|
1048 |
|
|
% paragraphs.
|
1049 |
|
|
%
|
1050 |
|
|
% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
|
1051 |
|
|
% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
|
1052 |
|
|
% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
|
1053 |
|
|
% By default, we suppress indentation.
|
1054 |
|
|
%
|
1055 |
|
|
\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
|
1056 |
|
|
\def\insertword{insert}
|
1057 |
|
|
%
|
1058 |
|
|
\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
|
1059 |
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
1060 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\noneword
|
1061 |
|
|
\let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
|
1062 |
|
|
\else\ifx\temp\insertword
|
1063 |
|
|
\let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
|
1064 |
|
|
\else
|
1065 |
|
|
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
1066 |
|
|
\errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
|
1067 |
|
|
\fi\fi
|
1068 |
|
|
}
|
1069 |
|
|
|
1070 |
|
|
% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to
|
1071 |
|
|
% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
|
1072 |
|
|
%
|
1073 |
|
|
% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
|
1074 |
|
|
% paragraph.
|
1075 |
|
|
%
|
1076 |
|
|
\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
|
1077 |
|
|
\gdef\indent{%
|
1078 |
|
|
\restorefirstparagraphindent
|
1079 |
|
|
\indent
|
1080 |
|
|
}%
|
1081 |
|
|
\gdef\noindent{%
|
1082 |
|
|
\restorefirstparagraphindent
|
1083 |
|
|
\noindent
|
1084 |
|
|
}%
|
1085 |
|
|
\global\everypar = {%
|
1086 |
|
|
\kern -\parindent
|
1087 |
|
|
\restorefirstparagraphindent
|
1088 |
|
|
}%
|
1089 |
|
|
}
|
1090 |
|
|
|
1091 |
|
|
\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
|
1092 |
|
|
\global \let \indent = \ptexindent
|
1093 |
|
|
\global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
|
1094 |
|
|
\global \everypar = {}%
|
1095 |
|
|
}
|
1096 |
|
|
|
1097 |
|
|
|
1098 |
|
|
% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
|
1099 |
|
|
%
|
1100 |
|
|
\def\asis#1{#1}
|
1101 |
|
|
|
1102 |
|
|
% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
|
1103 |
|
|
%
|
1104 |
|
|
% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
|
1105 |
|
|
% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make
|
1106 |
|
|
% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
|
1107 |
|
|
% which is what @var uses.
|
1108 |
|
|
{
|
1109 |
|
|
\catcode`\_ = \active
|
1110 |
|
|
\gdef\mathunderscore{%
|
1111 |
|
|
\catcode`\_=\active
|
1112 |
|
|
\def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
|
1113 |
|
|
}
|
1114 |
|
|
}
|
1115 |
|
|
% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
|
1116 |
|
|
% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
|
1117 |
|
|
% this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not
|
1118 |
|
|
% otherwise define @\.
|
1119 |
|
|
%
|
1120 |
|
|
% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
|
1121 |
|
|
\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
|
1122 |
|
|
%
|
1123 |
|
|
\def\math{%
|
1124 |
|
|
\tex
|
1125 |
|
|
\mathunderscore
|
1126 |
|
|
\let\\ = \mathbackslash
|
1127 |
|
|
\mathactive
|
1128 |
|
|
% make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode
|
1129 |
|
|
\let\"=\ddot
|
1130 |
|
|
\let\'=\acute
|
1131 |
|
|
\let\==\bar
|
1132 |
|
|
\let\^=\hat
|
1133 |
|
|
\let\`=\grave
|
1134 |
|
|
\let\u=\breve
|
1135 |
|
|
\let\v=\check
|
1136 |
|
|
\let\~=\tilde
|
1137 |
|
|
\let\dotaccent=\dot
|
1138 |
|
|
$\finishmath
|
1139 |
|
|
}
|
1140 |
|
|
\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex.
|
1141 |
|
|
|
1142 |
|
|
% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
|
1143 |
|
|
% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
|
1144 |
|
|
% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
|
1145 |
|
|
%
|
1146 |
|
|
{
|
1147 |
|
|
\catcode`^ = \active
|
1148 |
|
|
\catcode`< = \active
|
1149 |
|
|
\catcode`> = \active
|
1150 |
|
|
\catcode`+ = \active
|
1151 |
|
|
\catcode`' = \active
|
1152 |
|
|
\gdef\mathactive{%
|
1153 |
|
|
\let^ = \ptexhat
|
1154 |
|
|
\let< = \ptexless
|
1155 |
|
|
\let> = \ptexgtr
|
1156 |
|
|
\let+ = \ptexplus
|
1157 |
|
|
\let' = \ptexquoteright
|
1158 |
|
|
}
|
1159 |
|
|
}
|
1160 |
|
|
|
1161 |
|
|
% Some math mode symbols.
|
1162 |
|
|
\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
|
1163 |
|
|
\def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi}
|
1164 |
|
|
\def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi}
|
1165 |
|
|
\def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi}
|
1166 |
|
|
|
1167 |
|
|
% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
|
1168 |
|
|
% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
|
1169 |
|
|
% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
|
1170 |
|
|
% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do
|
1171 |
|
|
% whichever is larger.
|
1172 |
|
|
%
|
1173 |
|
|
\def\dots{%
|
1174 |
|
|
\leavevmode
|
1175 |
|
|
\setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods
|
1176 |
|
|
\ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em
|
1177 |
|
|
\dimen0 = \wd0
|
1178 |
|
|
\else
|
1179 |
|
|
\dimen0 = 1.5em
|
1180 |
|
|
\fi
|
1181 |
|
|
\hbox to \dimen0{%
|
1182 |
|
|
\hskip 0pt plus.25fil
|
1183 |
|
|
.\hskip 0pt plus1fil
|
1184 |
|
|
.\hskip 0pt plus1fil
|
1185 |
|
|
.\hskip 0pt plus.5fil
|
1186 |
|
|
}%
|
1187 |
|
|
}
|
1188 |
|
|
|
1189 |
|
|
% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
|
1190 |
|
|
%
|
1191 |
|
|
\def\enddots{%
|
1192 |
|
|
\dots
|
1193 |
|
|
\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
|
1194 |
|
|
}
|
1195 |
|
|
|
1196 |
|
|
% @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up
|
1197 |
|
|
% Texinfo's parsing.
|
1198 |
|
|
%
|
1199 |
|
|
\let\comma = ,
|
1200 |
|
|
|
1201 |
|
|
% @refill is a no-op.
|
1202 |
|
|
\let\refill=\relax
|
1203 |
|
|
|
1204 |
|
|
% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
|
1205 |
|
|
% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
|
1206 |
|
|
% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
|
1207 |
|
|
%
|
1208 |
|
|
\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
|
1209 |
|
|
\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
|
1210 |
|
|
|
1211 |
|
|
% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
|
1212 |
|
|
% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
|
1213 |
|
|
% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
|
1214 |
|
|
\def\setfilename{%
|
1215 |
|
|
\fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
|
1216 |
|
|
\iflinks
|
1217 |
|
|
\tryauxfile
|
1218 |
|
|
% Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
|
1219 |
|
|
\immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
|
1220 |
|
|
\fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
|
1221 |
|
|
\openindices
|
1222 |
|
|
\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
|
1223 |
|
|
%
|
1224 |
|
|
% If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
|
1225 |
|
|
% Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
|
1226 |
|
|
\openin 1 texinfo.cnf
|
1227 |
|
|
\ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
|
1228 |
|
|
\closein 1
|
1229 |
|
|
%
|
1230 |
|
|
\comment % Ignore the actual filename.
|
1231 |
|
|
}
|
1232 |
|
|
|
1233 |
|
|
% Called from \setfilename.
|
1234 |
|
|
%
|
1235 |
|
|
\def\openindices{%
|
1236 |
|
|
\newindex{cp}%
|
1237 |
|
|
\newcodeindex{fn}%
|
1238 |
|
|
\newcodeindex{vr}%
|
1239 |
|
|
\newcodeindex{tp}%
|
1240 |
|
|
\newcodeindex{ky}%
|
1241 |
|
|
\newcodeindex{pg}%
|
1242 |
|
|
}
|
1243 |
|
|
|
1244 |
|
|
% @bye.
|
1245 |
|
|
\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
|
1246 |
|
|
|
1247 |
|
|
|
1248 |
|
|
\message{pdf,}
|
1249 |
|
|
% adobe `portable' document format
|
1250 |
|
|
\newcount\tempnum
|
1251 |
|
|
\newcount\lnkcount
|
1252 |
|
|
\newtoks\filename
|
1253 |
|
|
\newcount\filenamelength
|
1254 |
|
|
\newcount\pgn
|
1255 |
|
|
\newtoks\toksA
|
1256 |
|
|
\newtoks\toksB
|
1257 |
|
|
\newtoks\toksC
|
1258 |
|
|
\newtoks\toksD
|
1259 |
|
|
\newbox\boxA
|
1260 |
|
|
\newcount\countA
|
1261 |
|
|
\newif\ifpdf
|
1262 |
|
|
\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
|
1263 |
|
|
|
1264 |
|
|
% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
|
1265 |
|
|
% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined,
|
1266 |
|
|
% borrowed from ifpdf.sty.
|
1267 |
|
|
\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
|
1268 |
|
|
\else
|
1269 |
|
|
\ifx\pdfoutput\relax
|
1270 |
|
|
\else
|
1271 |
|
|
\ifcase\pdfoutput
|
1272 |
|
|
\else
|
1273 |
|
|
\pdftrue
|
1274 |
|
|
\fi
|
1275 |
|
|
\fi
|
1276 |
|
|
\fi
|
1277 |
|
|
|
1278 |
|
|
% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
|
1279 |
|
|
% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to
|
1280 |
|
|
% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
|
1281 |
|
|
% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good.
|
1282 |
|
|
% http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html
|
1283 |
|
|
% (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX
|
1284 |
|
|
% user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
|
1285 |
|
|
% that's what we do).
|
1286 |
|
|
|
1287 |
|
|
% double active backslashes.
|
1288 |
|
|
%
|
1289 |
|
|
{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active
|
1290 |
|
|
@gdef@activebackslashdouble{%
|
1291 |
|
|
@catcode`@\=@active
|
1292 |
|
|
@let\=@doublebackslash}
|
1293 |
|
|
}
|
1294 |
|
|
|
1295 |
|
|
% To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are
|
1296 |
|
|
% not active characters. hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as
|
1297 |
|
|
% us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens, with minor
|
1298 |
|
|
% changes for Texinfo. It is included here under the GPL by permission
|
1299 |
|
|
% from the author, Heiko Oberdiek.
|
1300 |
|
|
%
|
1301 |
|
|
% #1 is the tokens to replace.
|
1302 |
|
|
% #2 is the replacement.
|
1303 |
|
|
% #3 is the control sequence with the string.
|
1304 |
|
|
%
|
1305 |
|
|
\def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{%
|
1306 |
|
|
\def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{%
|
1307 |
|
|
##1%
|
1308 |
|
|
\ifx\\##2\\%
|
1309 |
|
|
\else
|
1310 |
|
|
#2%
|
1311 |
|
|
\HyReturnAfterFi{%
|
1312 |
|
|
\HyPsdReplace##2\END
|
1313 |
|
|
}%
|
1314 |
|
|
\fi
|
1315 |
|
|
}%
|
1316 |
|
|
\xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}%
|
1317 |
|
|
}
|
1318 |
|
|
\long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1}
|
1319 |
|
|
|
1320 |
|
|
% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements.
|
1321 |
|
|
\def\backslashparens#1{%
|
1322 |
|
|
\xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply
|
1323 |
|
|
% \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest.
|
1324 |
|
|
\HyPsdSubst{(}{\realbackslash(}{#1}%
|
1325 |
|
|
\HyPsdSubst{)}{\realbackslash)}{#1}%
|
1326 |
|
|
}
|
1327 |
|
|
|
1328 |
|
|
\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images
|
1329 |
|
|
with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot
|
1330 |
|
|
be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI
|
1331 |
|
|
output) for that.)}
|
1332 |
|
|
|
1333 |
|
|
\ifpdf
|
1334 |
|
|
%
|
1335 |
|
|
% Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex.
|
1336 |
|
|
\def\cmykDarkRed{0.28 1 1 0.35}
|
1337 |
|
|
\def\cmykBlack{0 0 0 1}
|
1338 |
|
|
%
|
1339 |
|
|
% k sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.);
|
1340 |
|
|
% K sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s).
|
1341 |
|
|
\def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 k #1 K}}
|
1342 |
|
|
%
|
1343 |
|
|
% Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
|
1344 |
|
|
% so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
|
1345 |
|
|
\def\setcolor#1{%
|
1346 |
|
|
\xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
|
1347 |
|
|
\domark
|
1348 |
|
|
\pdfsetcolor{#1}%
|
1349 |
|
|
}
|
1350 |
|
|
%
|
1351 |
|
|
\def\maincolor{\cmykBlack}
|
1352 |
|
|
\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
|
1353 |
|
|
\edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
|
1354 |
|
|
\def\lastcolordefs{}
|
1355 |
|
|
%
|
1356 |
|
|
\def\makefootline{%
|
1357 |
|
|
\baselineskip24pt
|
1358 |
|
|
\line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
|
1359 |
|
|
}
|
1360 |
|
|
%
|
1361 |
|
|
\def\makeheadline{%
|
1362 |
|
|
\vbox to 0pt{%
|
1363 |
|
|
\vskip-22.5pt
|
1364 |
|
|
\line{%
|
1365 |
|
|
\vbox to8.5pt{}%
|
1366 |
|
|
% Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
|
1367 |
|
|
\getcolormarks
|
1368 |
|
|
% Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
|
1369 |
|
|
\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
|
1370 |
|
|
}%
|
1371 |
|
|
\vss
|
1372 |
|
|
}%
|
1373 |
|
|
\nointerlineskip
|
1374 |
|
|
}
|
1375 |
|
|
%
|
1376 |
|
|
%
|
1377 |
|
|
\pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}
|
1378 |
|
|
%
|
1379 |
|
|
% #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
|
1380 |
|
|
\def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
|
1381 |
|
|
\def\imagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
1382 |
|
|
\def\imageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
|
1383 |
|
|
%
|
1384 |
|
|
% pdftex (and the PDF format) support .png, .jpg, .pdf (among
|
1385 |
|
|
% others). Let's try in that order.
|
1386 |
|
|
\let\pdfimgext=\empty
|
1387 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
1388 |
|
|
\openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
|
1389 |
|
|
\openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
|
1390 |
|
|
\openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
|
1391 |
|
|
\openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
|
1392 |
|
|
\openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
|
1393 |
|
|
\openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
|
1394 |
|
|
\errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp
|
1395 |
|
|
\errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}%
|
1396 |
|
|
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}%
|
1397 |
|
|
\fi
|
1398 |
|
|
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}%
|
1399 |
|
|
\fi
|
1400 |
|
|
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}%
|
1401 |
|
|
\fi
|
1402 |
|
|
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}%
|
1403 |
|
|
\fi
|
1404 |
|
|
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}%
|
1405 |
|
|
\fi
|
1406 |
|
|
\else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}%
|
1407 |
|
|
\fi
|
1408 |
|
|
\closein 1
|
1409 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
1410 |
|
|
%
|
1411 |
|
|
% without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is
|
1412 |
|
|
% included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
|
1413 |
|
|
\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
|
1414 |
|
|
\immediate\pdfimage
|
1415 |
|
|
\else
|
1416 |
|
|
\immediate\pdfximage
|
1417 |
|
|
\fi
|
1418 |
|
|
\ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \imagewidth \fi
|
1419 |
|
|
\ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \imageheight \fi
|
1420 |
|
|
\ifnum\pdftexversion<13
|
1421 |
|
|
#1.\pdfimgext
|
1422 |
|
|
\else
|
1423 |
|
|
{#1.\pdfimgext}%
|
1424 |
|
|
\fi
|
1425 |
|
|
\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
|
1426 |
|
|
\pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
|
1427 |
|
|
\fi}
|
1428 |
|
|
%
|
1429 |
|
|
\def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
|
1430 |
|
|
% We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
|
1431 |
|
|
% such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
|
1432 |
|
|
\indexnofonts
|
1433 |
|
|
\turnoffactive
|
1434 |
|
|
\activebackslashdouble
|
1435 |
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
1436 |
|
|
\def\pdfdestname{#1}%
|
1437 |
|
|
\backslashparens\pdfdestname
|
1438 |
|
|
\safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
|
1439 |
|
|
}}
|
1440 |
|
|
%
|
1441 |
|
|
% used to mark target names; must be expandable.
|
1442 |
|
|
\def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
|
1443 |
|
|
%
|
1444 |
|
|
% by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as
|
1445 |
|
|
% nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing.
|
1446 |
|
|
\def\urlcolor{\cmykDarkRed}
|
1447 |
|
|
\def\linkcolor{\cmykDarkRed}
|
1448 |
|
|
\def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
|
1449 |
|
|
%
|
1450 |
|
|
% Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
|
1451 |
|
|
% come from Petr Olsak
|
1452 |
|
|
\def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
|
1453 |
|
|
\else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
|
1454 |
|
|
\def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
|
1455 |
|
|
\advance\tempnum by 1
|
1456 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
|
1457 |
|
|
%
|
1458 |
|
|
% #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
|
1459 |
|
|
% outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number
|
1460 |
|
|
% of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text,
|
1461 |
|
|
% which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
|
1462 |
|
|
% #4 is the page number
|
1463 |
|
|
%
|
1464 |
|
|
\def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
|
1465 |
|
|
% Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
|
1466 |
|
|
% page number. We could generate a destination for the section
|
1467 |
|
|
% text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
|
1468 |
|
|
% seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
|
1469 |
|
|
\def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
|
1470 |
|
|
\ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
|
1471 |
|
|
\def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
|
1472 |
|
|
\else
|
1473 |
|
|
% Doubled backslashes in the name.
|
1474 |
|
|
{\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
|
1475 |
|
|
\backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}%
|
1476 |
|
|
\fi
|
1477 |
|
|
%
|
1478 |
|
|
% Also double the backslashes in the display string.
|
1479 |
|
|
{\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
|
1480 |
|
|
\backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}%
|
1481 |
|
|
%
|
1482 |
|
|
\pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
|
1483 |
|
|
}
|
1484 |
|
|
%
|
1485 |
|
|
\def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
|
1486 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
1487 |
|
|
% Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
|
1488 |
|
|
\edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
|
1489 |
|
|
\edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
|
1490 |
|
|
%
|
1491 |
|
|
% Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
|
1492 |
|
|
\def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
1493 |
|
|
\def\thischapnum{##2}%
|
1494 |
|
|
\def\thissecnum{0}%
|
1495 |
|
|
\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
|
1496 |
|
|
}%
|
1497 |
|
|
\def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
1498 |
|
|
\advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
|
1499 |
|
|
\def\thissecnum{##2}%
|
1500 |
|
|
\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
|
1501 |
|
|
}%
|
1502 |
|
|
\def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
1503 |
|
|
\advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
|
1504 |
|
|
\def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
|
1505 |
|
|
}%
|
1506 |
|
|
\def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
1507 |
|
|
\advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
|
1508 |
|
|
}%
|
1509 |
|
|
\def\thischapnum{0}%
|
1510 |
|
|
\def\thissecnum{0}%
|
1511 |
|
|
\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
|
1512 |
|
|
%
|
1513 |
|
|
% use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
|
1514 |
|
|
% al. a second time, below.
|
1515 |
|
|
\def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
|
1516 |
|
|
\def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
|
1517 |
|
|
\def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
|
1518 |
|
|
\def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
|
1519 |
|
|
\def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
|
1520 |
|
|
\def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
|
1521 |
|
|
\def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
|
1522 |
|
|
\def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
|
1523 |
|
|
\readdatafile{toc}%
|
1524 |
|
|
%
|
1525 |
|
|
% Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
|
1526 |
|
|
% The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
|
1527 |
|
|
% subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
|
1528 |
|
|
%
|
1529 |
|
|
% We use the node names as the destinations.
|
1530 |
|
|
\def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
1531 |
|
|
\dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
|
1532 |
|
|
\def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
1533 |
|
|
\dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
|
1534 |
|
|
\def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
1535 |
|
|
\dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
|
1536 |
|
|
\def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
|
1537 |
|
|
\dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
|
1538 |
|
|
%
|
1539 |
|
|
% PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
|
1540 |
|
|
% document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters,
|
1541 |
|
|
% since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from
|
1542 |
|
|
% Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from
|
1543 |
|
|
% Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
|
1544 |
|
|
%
|
1545 |
|
|
% xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
|
1546 |
|
|
% their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Right
|
1547 |
|
|
% now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way.
|
1548 |
|
|
\indexnofonts
|
1549 |
|
|
\setupdatafile
|
1550 |
|
|
\catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
|
1551 |
|
|
\input \tocreadfilename
|
1552 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
1553 |
|
|
}
|
1554 |
|
|
%
|
1555 |
|
|
\def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
|
1556 |
|
|
\ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
|
1557 |
|
|
\else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
|
1558 |
|
|
\ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
|
1559 |
|
|
\advance\filenamelength by 1
|
1560 |
|
|
\fi
|
1561 |
|
|
\fi
|
1562 |
|
|
\nextsp}
|
1563 |
|
|
\def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
|
1564 |
|
|
\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
|
1565 |
|
|
\let \startlink \pdfannotlink
|
1566 |
|
|
\else
|
1567 |
|
|
\let \startlink \pdfstartlink
|
1568 |
|
|
\fi
|
1569 |
|
|
% make a live url in pdf output.
|
1570 |
|
|
\def\pdfurl#1{%
|
1571 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
1572 |
|
|
% it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
|
1573 |
|
|
% tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
|
1574 |
|
|
% of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
|
1575 |
|
|
% people have actually reported a problem with.
|
1576 |
|
|
%
|
1577 |
|
|
\normalturnoffactive
|
1578 |
|
|
\def\@{@}%
|
1579 |
|
|
\let\/=\empty
|
1580 |
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
1581 |
|
|
% do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just
|
1582 |
|
|
% special-casing \var here?
|
1583 |
|
|
\def\var##1{##1}%
|
1584 |
|
|
%
|
1585 |
|
|
\leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
|
1586 |
|
|
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
|
1587 |
|
|
user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
|
1588 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
1589 |
|
|
\def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
|
1590 |
|
|
\def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
|
1591 |
|
|
\def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
|
1592 |
|
|
\def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
|
1593 |
|
|
\def\maketoks{%
|
1594 |
|
|
\expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
|
1595 |
|
|
\ifx\first0\adn0
|
1596 |
|
|
\else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
|
1597 |
|
|
\else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
|
1598 |
|
|
\else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
|
1599 |
|
|
\else
|
1600 |
|
|
\ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
|
1601 |
|
|
\ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
|
1602 |
|
|
\let\next=\maketoks
|
1603 |
|
|
\addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
|
1604 |
|
|
\ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
|
1605 |
|
|
\fi
|
1606 |
|
|
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
1607 |
|
|
\next}
|
1608 |
|
|
\def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
|
1609 |
|
|
{\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
|
1610 |
|
|
\def\pdflink#1{%
|
1611 |
|
|
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
|
1612 |
|
|
\setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink}
|
1613 |
|
|
\def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
|
1614 |
|
|
\else
|
1615 |
|
|
% non-pdf mode
|
1616 |
|
|
\let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
|
1617 |
|
|
\let\pdfurl = \gobble
|
1618 |
|
|
\let\endlink = \relax
|
1619 |
|
|
\let\setcolor = \gobble
|
1620 |
|
|
\let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble
|
1621 |
|
|
\let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
|
1622 |
|
|
\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
|
1623 |
|
|
|
1624 |
|
|
|
1625 |
|
|
\message{fonts,}
|
1626 |
|
|
|
1627 |
|
|
% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
|
1628 |
|
|
% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
|
1629 |
|
|
% italics, not bold italics.
|
1630 |
|
|
%
|
1631 |
|
|
\def\setfontstyle#1{%
|
1632 |
|
|
\def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
|
1633 |
|
|
\csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font
|
1634 |
|
|
}
|
1635 |
|
|
|
1636 |
|
|
% Select #1 fonts with the current style.
|
1637 |
|
|
%
|
1638 |
|
|
\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
|
1639 |
|
|
|
1640 |
|
|
\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
|
1641 |
|
|
\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
|
1642 |
|
|
\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
|
1643 |
|
|
\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
|
1644 |
|
|
\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
|
1645 |
|
|
|
1646 |
|
|
% Unfortunately, we have to override this for titles and the like, since
|
1647 |
|
|
% in those cases "rm" is bold. Sigh.
|
1648 |
|
|
\def\rmisbold{\rm\def\curfontstyle{bf}}
|
1649 |
|
|
|
1650 |
|
|
% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
|
1651 |
|
|
% So we set up a \sf.
|
1652 |
|
|
\newfam\sffam
|
1653 |
|
|
\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
|
1654 |
|
|
\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
|
1655 |
|
|
|
1656 |
|
|
% We don't need math for this font style.
|
1657 |
|
|
\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
|
1658 |
|
|
|
1659 |
|
|
|
1660 |
|
|
% Default leading.
|
1661 |
|
|
\newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt
|
1662 |
|
|
|
1663 |
|
|
% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
|
1664 |
|
|
% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
|
1665 |
|
|
% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
|
1666 |
|
|
%
|
1667 |
|
|
\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
|
1668 |
|
|
\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
|
1669 |
|
|
\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
|
1670 |
|
|
%
|
1671 |
|
|
% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this.
|
1672 |
|
|
\def\baselinefactor{1}
|
1673 |
|
|
%
|
1674 |
|
|
\def\setleading#1{%
|
1675 |
|
|
\dimen0 = #1\relax
|
1676 |
|
|
\normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0
|
1677 |
|
|
\normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
|
1678 |
|
|
\normalbaselines
|
1679 |
|
|
\setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
|
1680 |
|
|
\vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
|
1681 |
|
|
depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
|
1682 |
|
|
}%
|
1683 |
|
|
}
|
1684 |
|
|
|
1685 |
|
|
% PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap.
|
1686 |
|
|
%
|
1687 |
|
|
% do nothing with this by default.
|
1688 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble
|
1689 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble
|
1690 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble
|
1691 |
|
|
|
1692 |
|
|
% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps.
|
1693 |
|
|
% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run
|
1694 |
|
|
% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.)
|
1695 |
|
|
\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\undefined \else
|
1696 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
1697 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
|
1698 |
|
|
\catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
|
1699 |
|
|
%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
1700 |
|
|
%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
1701 |
|
|
%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0)
|
1702 |
|
|
%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0)
|
1703 |
|
|
%%Version: 1.000
|
1704 |
|
|
%%EndComments
|
1705 |
|
|
/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
|
1706 |
|
|
12 dict begin
|
1707 |
|
|
begincmap
|
1708 |
|
|
/CIDSystemInfo
|
1709 |
|
|
<< /Registry (TeX)
|
1710 |
|
|
/Ordering (OT1)
|
1711 |
|
|
/Supplement 0
|
1712 |
|
|
>> def
|
1713 |
|
|
/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def
|
1714 |
|
|
/CMapType 2 def
|
1715 |
|
|
1 begincodespacerange
|
1716 |
|
|
<00> <7F>
|
1717 |
|
|
endcodespacerange
|
1718 |
|
|
8 beginbfrange
|
1719 |
|
|
<00> <01> <0393>
|
1720 |
|
|
<09> <0A> <03A8>
|
1721 |
|
|
<23> <26> <0023>
|
1722 |
|
|
<28> <3B> <0028>
|
1723 |
|
|
<3F> <5B> <003F>
|
1724 |
|
|
<5D> <5E> <005D>
|
1725 |
|
|
<61> <7A> <0061>
|
1726 |
|
|
<7B> <7C> <2013>
|
1727 |
|
|
endbfrange
|
1728 |
|
|
40 beginbfchar
|
1729 |
|
|
<02> <0398>
|
1730 |
|
|
<03> <039B>
|
1731 |
|
|
<04> <039E>
|
1732 |
|
|
<05> <03A0>
|
1733 |
|
|
<06> <03A3>
|
1734 |
|
|
<07> <03D2>
|
1735 |
|
|
<08> <03A6>
|
1736 |
|
|
<0B> <00660066>
|
1737 |
|
|
<0C> <00660069>
|
1738 |
|
|
<0D> <0066006C>
|
1739 |
|
|
<0E> <006600660069>
|
1740 |
|
|
<0F> <00660066006C>
|
1741 |
|
|
<10> <0131>
|
1742 |
|
|
<11> <0237>
|
1743 |
|
|
<12> <0060>
|
1744 |
|
|
<13> <00B4>
|
1745 |
|
|
<14> <02C7>
|
1746 |
|
|
<15> <02D8>
|
1747 |
|
|
<16> <00AF>
|
1748 |
|
|
<17> <02DA>
|
1749 |
|
|
<18> <00B8>
|
1750 |
|
|
<19> <00DF>
|
1751 |
|
|
<1A> <00E6>
|
1752 |
|
|
<1B> <0153>
|
1753 |
|
|
<1C> <00F8>
|
1754 |
|
|
<1D> <00C6>
|
1755 |
|
|
<1E> <0152>
|
1756 |
|
|
<1F> <00D8>
|
1757 |
|
|
<21> <0021>
|
1758 |
|
|
<22> <201D>
|
1759 |
|
|
<27> <2019>
|
1760 |
|
|
<3C> <00A1>
|
1761 |
|
|
<3D> <003D>
|
1762 |
|
|
<3E> <00BF>
|
1763 |
|
|
<5C> <201C>
|
1764 |
|
|
<5F> <02D9>
|
1765 |
|
|
<60> <2018>
|
1766 |
|
|
<7D> <02DD>
|
1767 |
|
|
<7E> <007E>
|
1768 |
|
|
<7F> <00A8>
|
1769 |
|
|
endbfchar
|
1770 |
|
|
endcmap
|
1771 |
|
|
CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
|
1772 |
|
|
end
|
1773 |
|
|
end
|
1774 |
|
|
%%EndResource
|
1775 |
|
|
%%EOF
|
1776 |
|
|
}\endgroup
|
1777 |
|
|
\expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{%
|
1778 |
|
|
\pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
|
1779 |
|
|
}%
|
1780 |
|
|
%
|
1781 |
|
|
% \cmapOT1IT
|
1782 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
1783 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
|
1784 |
|
|
\catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
|
1785 |
|
|
%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
1786 |
|
|
%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
1787 |
|
|
%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0)
|
1788 |
|
|
%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0)
|
1789 |
|
|
%%Version: 1.000
|
1790 |
|
|
%%EndComments
|
1791 |
|
|
/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
|
1792 |
|
|
12 dict begin
|
1793 |
|
|
begincmap
|
1794 |
|
|
/CIDSystemInfo
|
1795 |
|
|
<< /Registry (TeX)
|
1796 |
|
|
/Ordering (OT1IT)
|
1797 |
|
|
/Supplement 0
|
1798 |
|
|
>> def
|
1799 |
|
|
/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def
|
1800 |
|
|
/CMapType 2 def
|
1801 |
|
|
1 begincodespacerange
|
1802 |
|
|
<00> <7F>
|
1803 |
|
|
endcodespacerange
|
1804 |
|
|
8 beginbfrange
|
1805 |
|
|
<00> <01> <0393>
|
1806 |
|
|
<09> <0A> <03A8>
|
1807 |
|
|
<25> <26> <0025>
|
1808 |
|
|
<28> <3B> <0028>
|
1809 |
|
|
<3F> <5B> <003F>
|
1810 |
|
|
<5D> <5E> <005D>
|
1811 |
|
|
<61> <7A> <0061>
|
1812 |
|
|
<7B> <7C> <2013>
|
1813 |
|
|
endbfrange
|
1814 |
|
|
42 beginbfchar
|
1815 |
|
|
<02> <0398>
|
1816 |
|
|
<03> <039B>
|
1817 |
|
|
<04> <039E>
|
1818 |
|
|
<05> <03A0>
|
1819 |
|
|
<06> <03A3>
|
1820 |
|
|
<07> <03D2>
|
1821 |
|
|
<08> <03A6>
|
1822 |
|
|
<0B> <00660066>
|
1823 |
|
|
<0C> <00660069>
|
1824 |
|
|
<0D> <0066006C>
|
1825 |
|
|
<0E> <006600660069>
|
1826 |
|
|
<0F> <00660066006C>
|
1827 |
|
|
<10> <0131>
|
1828 |
|
|
<11> <0237>
|
1829 |
|
|
<12> <0060>
|
1830 |
|
|
<13> <00B4>
|
1831 |
|
|
<14> <02C7>
|
1832 |
|
|
<15> <02D8>
|
1833 |
|
|
<16> <00AF>
|
1834 |
|
|
<17> <02DA>
|
1835 |
|
|
<18> <00B8>
|
1836 |
|
|
<19> <00DF>
|
1837 |
|
|
<1A> <00E6>
|
1838 |
|
|
<1B> <0153>
|
1839 |
|
|
<1C> <00F8>
|
1840 |
|
|
<1D> <00C6>
|
1841 |
|
|
<1E> <0152>
|
1842 |
|
|
<1F> <00D8>
|
1843 |
|
|
<21> <0021>
|
1844 |
|
|
<22> <201D>
|
1845 |
|
|
<23> <0023>
|
1846 |
|
|
<24> <00A3>
|
1847 |
|
|
<27> <2019>
|
1848 |
|
|
<3C> <00A1>
|
1849 |
|
|
<3D> <003D>
|
1850 |
|
|
<3E> <00BF>
|
1851 |
|
|
<5C> <201C>
|
1852 |
|
|
<5F> <02D9>
|
1853 |
|
|
<60> <2018>
|
1854 |
|
|
<7D> <02DD>
|
1855 |
|
|
<7E> <007E>
|
1856 |
|
|
<7F> <00A8>
|
1857 |
|
|
endbfchar
|
1858 |
|
|
endcmap
|
1859 |
|
|
CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
|
1860 |
|
|
end
|
1861 |
|
|
end
|
1862 |
|
|
%%EndResource
|
1863 |
|
|
%%EOF
|
1864 |
|
|
}\endgroup
|
1865 |
|
|
\expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{%
|
1866 |
|
|
\pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
|
1867 |
|
|
}%
|
1868 |
|
|
%
|
1869 |
|
|
% \cmapOT1TT
|
1870 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
1871 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
|
1872 |
|
|
\catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
|
1873 |
|
|
%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
1874 |
|
|
%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
1875 |
|
|
%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0)
|
1876 |
|
|
%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0)
|
1877 |
|
|
%%Version: 1.000
|
1878 |
|
|
%%EndComments
|
1879 |
|
|
/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
|
1880 |
|
|
12 dict begin
|
1881 |
|
|
begincmap
|
1882 |
|
|
/CIDSystemInfo
|
1883 |
|
|
<< /Registry (TeX)
|
1884 |
|
|
/Ordering (OT1TT)
|
1885 |
|
|
/Supplement 0
|
1886 |
|
|
>> def
|
1887 |
|
|
/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def
|
1888 |
|
|
/CMapType 2 def
|
1889 |
|
|
1 begincodespacerange
|
1890 |
|
|
<00> <7F>
|
1891 |
|
|
endcodespacerange
|
1892 |
|
|
5 beginbfrange
|
1893 |
|
|
<00> <01> <0393>
|
1894 |
|
|
<09> <0A> <03A8>
|
1895 |
|
|
<21> <26> <0021>
|
1896 |
|
|
<28> <5F> <0028>
|
1897 |
|
|
<61> <7E> <0061>
|
1898 |
|
|
endbfrange
|
1899 |
|
|
32 beginbfchar
|
1900 |
|
|
<02> <0398>
|
1901 |
|
|
<03> <039B>
|
1902 |
|
|
<04> <039E>
|
1903 |
|
|
<05> <03A0>
|
1904 |
|
|
<06> <03A3>
|
1905 |
|
|
<07> <03D2>
|
1906 |
|
|
<08> <03A6>
|
1907 |
|
|
<0B> <2191>
|
1908 |
|
|
<0C> <2193>
|
1909 |
|
|
<0D> <0027>
|
1910 |
|
|
<0E> <00A1>
|
1911 |
|
|
<0F> <00BF>
|
1912 |
|
|
<10> <0131>
|
1913 |
|
|
<11> <0237>
|
1914 |
|
|
<12> <0060>
|
1915 |
|
|
<13> <00B4>
|
1916 |
|
|
<14> <02C7>
|
1917 |
|
|
<15> <02D8>
|
1918 |
|
|
<16> <00AF>
|
1919 |
|
|
<17> <02DA>
|
1920 |
|
|
<18> <00B8>
|
1921 |
|
|
<19> <00DF>
|
1922 |
|
|
<1A> <00E6>
|
1923 |
|
|
<1B> <0153>
|
1924 |
|
|
<1C> <00F8>
|
1925 |
|
|
<1D> <00C6>
|
1926 |
|
|
<1E> <0152>
|
1927 |
|
|
<1F> <00D8>
|
1928 |
|
|
<20> <2423>
|
1929 |
|
|
<27> <2019>
|
1930 |
|
|
<60> <2018>
|
1931 |
|
|
<7F> <00A8>
|
1932 |
|
|
endbfchar
|
1933 |
|
|
endcmap
|
1934 |
|
|
CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
|
1935 |
|
|
end
|
1936 |
|
|
end
|
1937 |
|
|
%%EndResource
|
1938 |
|
|
%%EOF
|
1939 |
|
|
}\endgroup
|
1940 |
|
|
\expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{%
|
1941 |
|
|
\pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
|
1942 |
|
|
}%
|
1943 |
|
|
\fi\fi
|
1944 |
|
|
|
1945 |
|
|
|
1946 |
|
|
% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
|
1947 |
|
|
% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
|
1948 |
|
|
% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap
|
1949 |
|
|
% encoding (currently only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, pass
|
1950 |
|
|
% empty to omit).
|
1951 |
|
|
\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{%
|
1952 |
|
|
\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4
|
1953 |
|
|
\csname cmap#5\endcsname#1%
|
1954 |
|
|
}
|
1955 |
|
|
% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty.
|
1956 |
|
|
\let\cmap\gobble
|
1957 |
|
|
% emacs-page end of cmaps
|
1958 |
|
|
|
1959 |
|
|
% Use cm as the default font prefix.
|
1960 |
|
|
% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
|
1961 |
|
|
% before you read in texinfo.tex.
|
1962 |
|
|
\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
|
1963 |
|
|
\def\fontprefix{cm}
|
1964 |
|
|
\fi
|
1965 |
|
|
% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
|
1966 |
|
|
\def\rmshape{r}
|
1967 |
|
|
\def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold
|
1968 |
|
|
\def\bfshape{b}
|
1969 |
|
|
\def\bxshape{bx}
|
1970 |
|
|
\def\ttshape{tt}
|
1971 |
|
|
\def\ttbshape{tt}
|
1972 |
|
|
\def\ttslshape{sltt}
|
1973 |
|
|
\def\itshape{ti}
|
1974 |
|
|
\def\itbshape{bxti}
|
1975 |
|
|
\def\slshape{sl}
|
1976 |
|
|
\def\slbshape{bxsl}
|
1977 |
|
|
\def\sfshape{ss}
|
1978 |
|
|
\def\sfbshape{ss}
|
1979 |
|
|
\def\scshape{csc}
|
1980 |
|
|
\def\scbshape{csc}
|
1981 |
|
|
|
1982 |
|
|
% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. This is the default in
|
1983 |
|
|
% Texinfo.
|
1984 |
|
|
%
|
1985 |
|
|
\def\definetextfontsizexi{%
|
1986 |
|
|
% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
|
1987 |
|
|
\def\textnominalsize{11pt}
|
1988 |
|
|
\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
|
1989 |
|
|
\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
1990 |
|
|
\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
|
1991 |
|
|
\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
1992 |
|
|
\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
|
1993 |
|
|
\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
1994 |
|
|
\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
1995 |
|
|
\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
1996 |
|
|
\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
|
1997 |
|
|
\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
1998 |
|
|
\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
1999 |
|
|
\def\textecsize{1095}
|
2000 |
|
|
|
2001 |
|
|
% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
|
2002 |
|
|
\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
2003 |
|
|
\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
2004 |
|
|
\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
2005 |
|
|
\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
|
2006 |
|
|
|
2007 |
|
|
% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
|
2008 |
|
|
\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
|
2009 |
|
|
\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
2010 |
|
|
\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
2011 |
|
|
\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
2012 |
|
|
\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
2013 |
|
|
\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
2014 |
|
|
\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
2015 |
|
|
\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
2016 |
|
|
\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
|
2017 |
|
|
\font\smalli=cmmi9
|
2018 |
|
|
\font\smallsy=cmsy9
|
2019 |
|
|
\def\smallecsize{0900}
|
2020 |
|
|
|
2021 |
|
|
% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
|
2022 |
|
|
\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
|
2023 |
|
|
\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
2024 |
|
|
\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
2025 |
|
|
\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
|
2026 |
|
|
\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
2027 |
|
|
\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
2028 |
|
|
\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
2029 |
|
|
\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
|
2030 |
|
|
\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
|
2031 |
|
|
\font\smalleri=cmmi8
|
2032 |
|
|
\font\smallersy=cmsy8
|
2033 |
|
|
\def\smallerecsize{0800}
|
2034 |
|
|
|
2035 |
|
|
% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
|
2036 |
|
|
\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
|
2037 |
|
|
\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
|
2038 |
|
|
\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
|
2039 |
|
|
\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
|
2040 |
|
|
\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
|
2041 |
|
|
\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
|
2042 |
|
|
\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
2043 |
|
|
\let\titlebf=\titlerm
|
2044 |
|
|
\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
|
2045 |
|
|
\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
|
2046 |
|
|
\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
|
2047 |
|
|
\def\titleecsize{2074}
|
2048 |
|
|
|
2049 |
|
|
% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
|
2050 |
|
|
\def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
|
2051 |
|
|
\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
2052 |
|
|
\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT}
|
2053 |
|
|
\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
|
2054 |
|
|
\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
|
2055 |
|
|
\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
|
2056 |
|
|
\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1}
|
2057 |
|
|
\let\chapbf=\chaprm
|
2058 |
|
|
\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
|
2059 |
|
|
\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
|
2060 |
|
|
\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
|
2061 |
|
|
\def\chapecsize{1728}
|
2062 |
|
|
|
2063 |
|
|
% Section fonts (14.4pt).
|
2064 |
|
|
\def\secnominalsize{14pt}
|
2065 |
|
|
\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
2066 |
|
|
\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
|
2067 |
|
|
\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
2068 |
|
|
\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
2069 |
|
|
\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
|
2070 |
|
|
\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
2071 |
|
|
\let\secbf\secrm
|
2072 |
|
|
\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
2073 |
|
|
\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
|
2074 |
|
|
\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
|
2075 |
|
|
\def\sececsize{1440}
|
2076 |
|
|
|
2077 |
|
|
% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
|
2078 |
|
|
\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
|
2079 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
|
2080 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT}
|
2081 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
|
2082 |
|
|
\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
|
2083 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT}
|
2084 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
|
2085 |
|
|
\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
|
2086 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
|
2087 |
|
|
\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
|
2088 |
|
|
\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
|
2089 |
|
|
\def\ssececsize{1200}
|
2090 |
|
|
|
2091 |
|
|
% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
|
2092 |
|
|
\def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
|
2093 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
2094 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
2095 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
2096 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
2097 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
2098 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
2099 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
2100 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
2101 |
|
|
\font\reducedi=cmmi10
|
2102 |
|
|
\font\reducedsy=cmsy10
|
2103 |
|
|
\def\reducedecsize{1000}
|
2104 |
|
|
|
2105 |
|
|
% reset the current fonts
|
2106 |
|
|
\textfonts
|
2107 |
|
|
\rm
|
2108 |
|
|
} % end of 11pt text font size definitions
|
2109 |
|
|
|
2110 |
|
|
|
2111 |
|
|
% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with
|
2112 |
|
|
% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU
|
2113 |
|
|
% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the
|
2114 |
|
|
% future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt.
|
2115 |
|
|
%
|
2116 |
|
|
\def\definetextfontsizex{%
|
2117 |
|
|
% Text fonts (10pt).
|
2118 |
|
|
\def\textnominalsize{10pt}
|
2119 |
|
|
\edef\mainmagstep{1000}
|
2120 |
|
|
\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
2121 |
|
|
\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
|
2122 |
|
|
\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
2123 |
|
|
\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
|
2124 |
|
|
\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
2125 |
|
|
\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
2126 |
|
|
\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
2127 |
|
|
\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
|
2128 |
|
|
\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
2129 |
|
|
\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
2130 |
|
|
\def\textecsize{1000}
|
2131 |
|
|
|
2132 |
|
|
% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
|
2133 |
|
|
\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
|
2134 |
|
|
\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
|
2135 |
|
|
\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
|
2136 |
|
|
\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
|
2137 |
|
|
|
2138 |
|
|
% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
|
2139 |
|
|
\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
|
2140 |
|
|
\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
2141 |
|
|
\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
2142 |
|
|
\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
2143 |
|
|
\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
2144 |
|
|
\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
2145 |
|
|
\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
2146 |
|
|
\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
2147 |
|
|
\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
|
2148 |
|
|
\font\smalli=cmmi9
|
2149 |
|
|
\font\smallsy=cmsy9
|
2150 |
|
|
\def\smallecsize{0900}
|
2151 |
|
|
|
2152 |
|
|
% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
|
2153 |
|
|
\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
|
2154 |
|
|
\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
2155 |
|
|
\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
2156 |
|
|
\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
|
2157 |
|
|
\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
2158 |
|
|
\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
2159 |
|
|
\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
2160 |
|
|
\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
|
2161 |
|
|
\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
|
2162 |
|
|
\font\smalleri=cmmi8
|
2163 |
|
|
\font\smallersy=cmsy8
|
2164 |
|
|
\def\smallerecsize{0800}
|
2165 |
|
|
|
2166 |
|
|
% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
|
2167 |
|
|
\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
|
2168 |
|
|
\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
|
2169 |
|
|
\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
|
2170 |
|
|
\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
|
2171 |
|
|
\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
|
2172 |
|
|
\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
|
2173 |
|
|
\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
2174 |
|
|
\let\titlebf=\titlerm
|
2175 |
|
|
\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
|
2176 |
|
|
\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
|
2177 |
|
|
\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
|
2178 |
|
|
\def\titleecsize{2074}
|
2179 |
|
|
|
2180 |
|
|
% Chapter fonts (14.4pt).
|
2181 |
|
|
\def\chapnominalsize{14pt}
|
2182 |
|
|
\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
2183 |
|
|
\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
|
2184 |
|
|
\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
2185 |
|
|
\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
2186 |
|
|
\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
|
2187 |
|
|
\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
2188 |
|
|
\let\chapbf\chaprm
|
2189 |
|
|
\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
2190 |
|
|
\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
|
2191 |
|
|
\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
|
2192 |
|
|
\def\chapecsize{1440}
|
2193 |
|
|
|
2194 |
|
|
% Section fonts (12pt).
|
2195 |
|
|
\def\secnominalsize{12pt}
|
2196 |
|
|
\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
|
2197 |
|
|
\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT}
|
2198 |
|
|
\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
2199 |
|
|
\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
2200 |
|
|
\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
2201 |
|
|
\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
|
2202 |
|
|
\let\secbf\secrm
|
2203 |
|
|
\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
2204 |
|
|
\font\seci=cmmi12
|
2205 |
|
|
\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
|
2206 |
|
|
\def\sececsize{1200}
|
2207 |
|
|
|
2208 |
|
|
% Subsection fonts (10pt).
|
2209 |
|
|
\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt}
|
2210 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
2211 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
2212 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
2213 |
|
|
\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
2214 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
2215 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
2216 |
|
|
\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
|
2217 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
2218 |
|
|
\font\sseci=cmmi10
|
2219 |
|
|
\font\ssecsy=cmsy10
|
2220 |
|
|
\def\ssececsize{1000}
|
2221 |
|
|
|
2222 |
|
|
% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt).
|
2223 |
|
|
\def\reducednominalsize{9pt}
|
2224 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
2225 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
2226 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
2227 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
2228 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
2229 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
2230 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
2231 |
|
|
\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
|
2232 |
|
|
\font\reducedi=cmmi9
|
2233 |
|
|
\font\reducedsy=cmsy9
|
2234 |
|
|
\def\reducedecsize{0900}
|
2235 |
|
|
|
2236 |
|
|
% reduce space between paragraphs
|
2237 |
|
|
\divide\parskip by 2
|
2238 |
|
|
|
2239 |
|
|
% reset the current fonts
|
2240 |
|
|
\textfonts
|
2241 |
|
|
\rm
|
2242 |
|
|
} % end of 10pt text font size definitions
|
2243 |
|
|
|
2244 |
|
|
|
2245 |
|
|
% We provide the user-level command
|
2246 |
|
|
% @fonttextsize 10
|
2247 |
|
|
% (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed.
|
2248 |
|
|
%
|
2249 |
|
|
\def\xword{10}
|
2250 |
|
|
\def\xiword{11}
|
2251 |
|
|
%
|
2252 |
|
|
\parseargdef\fonttextsize{%
|
2253 |
|
|
\def\textsizearg{#1}%
|
2254 |
|
|
\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
|
2255 |
|
|
%
|
2256 |
|
|
% Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since
|
2257 |
|
|
% makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless.
|
2258 |
|
|
%
|
2259 |
|
|
\begingroup \globaldefs=1
|
2260 |
|
|
\ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex
|
2261 |
|
|
\else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi
|
2262 |
|
|
\else
|
2263 |
|
|
\errhelp=\EMsimple
|
2264 |
|
|
\errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'}
|
2265 |
|
|
\fi\fi
|
2266 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
2267 |
|
|
}
|
2268 |
|
|
|
2269 |
|
|
|
2270 |
|
|
% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
|
2271 |
|
|
% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since
|
2272 |
|
|
% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
|
2273 |
|
|
% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
|
2274 |
|
|
% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
|
2275 |
|
|
%
|
2276 |
|
|
\def\resetmathfonts{%
|
2277 |
|
|
\textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
|
2278 |
|
|
\textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
|
2279 |
|
|
\textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
|
2280 |
|
|
}
|
2281 |
|
|
|
2282 |
|
|
% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
|
2283 |
|
|
% of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
|
2284 |
|
|
% current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
|
2285 |
|
|
% \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
|
2286 |
|
|
%
|
2287 |
|
|
% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
|
2288 |
|
|
% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in
|
2289 |
|
|
% the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
|
2290 |
|
|
%
|
2291 |
|
|
% This all needs generalizing, badly.
|
2292 |
|
|
%
|
2293 |
|
|
\def\textfonts{%
|
2294 |
|
|
\let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
|
2295 |
|
|
\let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
|
2296 |
|
|
\let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
|
2297 |
|
|
\let\tenttsl=\textttsl
|
2298 |
|
|
\def\curfontsize{text}%
|
2299 |
|
|
\def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
|
2300 |
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
|
2301 |
|
|
\def\titlefonts{%
|
2302 |
|
|
\let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
|
2303 |
|
|
\let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
|
2304 |
|
|
\let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
|
2305 |
|
|
\let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
|
2306 |
|
|
\def\curfontsize{title}%
|
2307 |
|
|
\def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
|
2308 |
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
|
2309 |
|
|
\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}}
|
2310 |
|
|
\def\chapfonts{%
|
2311 |
|
|
\let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
|
2312 |
|
|
\let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
|
2313 |
|
|
\let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
|
2314 |
|
|
\let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
|
2315 |
|
|
\def\curfontsize{chap}%
|
2316 |
|
|
\def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
|
2317 |
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
|
2318 |
|
|
\def\secfonts{%
|
2319 |
|
|
\let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
|
2320 |
|
|
\let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
|
2321 |
|
|
\let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
|
2322 |
|
|
\let\tenttsl=\secttsl
|
2323 |
|
|
\def\curfontsize{sec}%
|
2324 |
|
|
\def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
|
2325 |
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
|
2326 |
|
|
\def\subsecfonts{%
|
2327 |
|
|
\let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
|
2328 |
|
|
\let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
|
2329 |
|
|
\let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
|
2330 |
|
|
\let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
|
2331 |
|
|
\def\curfontsize{ssec}%
|
2332 |
|
|
\def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
|
2333 |
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
|
2334 |
|
|
\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
|
2335 |
|
|
\def\reducedfonts{%
|
2336 |
|
|
\let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
|
2337 |
|
|
\let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
|
2338 |
|
|
\let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
|
2339 |
|
|
\let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
|
2340 |
|
|
\def\curfontsize{reduced}%
|
2341 |
|
|
\def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
|
2342 |
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
|
2343 |
|
|
\def\smallfonts{%
|
2344 |
|
|
\let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
|
2345 |
|
|
\let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
|
2346 |
|
|
\let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
|
2347 |
|
|
\let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
|
2348 |
|
|
\def\curfontsize{small}%
|
2349 |
|
|
\def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
|
2350 |
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
|
2351 |
|
|
\def\smallerfonts{%
|
2352 |
|
|
\let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
|
2353 |
|
|
\let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
|
2354 |
|
|
\let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
|
2355 |
|
|
\let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
|
2356 |
|
|
\def\curfontsize{smaller}%
|
2357 |
|
|
\def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
|
2358 |
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
|
2359 |
|
|
|
2360 |
|
|
% Fonts for short table of contents.
|
2361 |
|
|
\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
|
2362 |
|
|
\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12
|
2363 |
|
|
\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
|
2364 |
|
|
\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
2365 |
|
|
|
2366 |
|
|
% Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
|
2367 |
|
|
\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
|
2368 |
|
|
\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
|
2369 |
|
|
|
2370 |
|
|
% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
|
2371 |
|
|
\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
|
2372 |
|
|
|
2373 |
|
|
% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
|
2374 |
|
|
% can fit this many characters:
|
2375 |
|
|
% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69
|
2376 |
|
|
% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
|
2377 |
|
|
% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77
|
2378 |
|
|
% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
|
2379 |
|
|
% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt.
|
2380 |
|
|
%
|
2381 |
|
|
% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
|
2382 |
|
|
% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58
|
2383 |
|
|
% --karl, 24jan03.
|
2384 |
|
|
|
2385 |
|
|
% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
|
2386 |
|
|
%
|
2387 |
|
|
\definetextfontsizexi
|
2388 |
|
|
|
2389 |
|
|
|
2390 |
|
|
\message{markup,}
|
2391 |
|
|
|
2392 |
|
|
% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
|
2393 |
|
|
% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
|
2394 |
|
|
% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
|
2395 |
|
|
% this property, we can check that font parameter.
|
2396 |
|
|
%
|
2397 |
|
|
\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
|
2398 |
|
|
|
2399 |
|
|
% Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will
|
2400 |
|
|
% define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes.
|
2401 |
|
|
% \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost
|
2402 |
|
|
% style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles
|
2403 |
|
|
% currently in effect.
|
2404 |
|
|
\newif\ifmarkupvar
|
2405 |
|
|
\newif\ifmarkupsamp
|
2406 |
|
|
\newif\ifmarkupkey
|
2407 |
|
|
%\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp.
|
2408 |
|
|
%\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp.
|
2409 |
|
|
\newif\ifmarkupcode
|
2410 |
|
|
\newif\ifmarkupkbd
|
2411 |
|
|
%\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code.
|
2412 |
|
|
%\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code.
|
2413 |
|
|
\newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now).
|
2414 |
|
|
\newif\ifmarkupexample
|
2415 |
|
|
\newif\ifmarkupverb
|
2416 |
|
|
\newif\ifmarkupverbatim
|
2417 |
|
|
|
2418 |
|
|
\let\currentmarkupstyle\empty
|
2419 |
|
|
|
2420 |
|
|
\def\setupmarkupstyle#1{%
|
2421 |
|
|
\csname markup#1true\endcsname
|
2422 |
|
|
\def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}%
|
2423 |
|
|
\markupstylesetup
|
2424 |
|
|
}
|
2425 |
|
|
|
2426 |
|
|
\let\markupstylesetup\empty
|
2427 |
|
|
|
2428 |
|
|
\def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{%
|
2429 |
|
|
\expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup
|
2430 |
|
|
\expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}%
|
2431 |
|
|
\def#1%
|
2432 |
|
|
}
|
2433 |
|
|
|
2434 |
|
|
% Markup style setup for left and right quotes.
|
2435 |
|
|
\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{%
|
2436 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter \temp \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
|
2437 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi
|
2438 |
|
|
}
|
2439 |
|
|
|
2440 |
|
|
\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{%
|
2441 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter \temp \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
|
2442 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi
|
2443 |
|
|
}
|
2444 |
|
|
|
2445 |
|
|
{
|
2446 |
|
|
\catcode`\'=\active
|
2447 |
|
|
\catcode`\`=\active
|
2448 |
|
|
|
2449 |
|
|
\gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq}
|
2450 |
|
|
\gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq}
|
2451 |
|
|
|
2452 |
|
|
\gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft}
|
2453 |
|
|
\gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright}
|
2454 |
|
|
|
2455 |
|
|
\gdef\markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft{\let`\noligaturesquoteleft}
|
2456 |
|
|
}
|
2457 |
|
|
|
2458 |
|
|
\let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
2459 |
|
|
\let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright
|
2460 |
|
|
\let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
2461 |
|
|
\let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright
|
2462 |
|
|
\let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
2463 |
|
|
\let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright
|
2464 |
|
|
\let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
2465 |
|
|
\let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright
|
2466 |
|
|
|
2467 |
|
|
\let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft
|
2468 |
|
|
\let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft
|
2469 |
|
|
|
2470 |
|
|
% Allow an option to not replace quotes with a regular directed right
|
2471 |
|
|
% quote/apostrophe (char 0x27), but instead use the undirected quote
|
2472 |
|
|
% from cmtt (char 0x0d). The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it
|
2473 |
|
|
% the default, but it works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least
|
2474 |
|
|
% evince), the lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the
|
2475 |
|
|
% regular 0x27.
|
2476 |
|
|
%
|
2477 |
|
|
\def\codequoteright{%
|
2478 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
|
2479 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
|
2480 |
|
|
'%
|
2481 |
|
|
\else \char'15 \fi
|
2482 |
|
|
\else \char'15 \fi
|
2483 |
|
|
}
|
2484 |
|
|
%
|
2485 |
|
|
% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent.
|
2486 |
|
|
% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like
|
2487 |
|
|
% the code environments to do likewise.
|
2488 |
|
|
%
|
2489 |
|
|
\def\codequoteleft{%
|
2490 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
|
2491 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
|
2492 |
|
|
% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
|
2493 |
|
|
% \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
|
2494 |
|
|
\relax`%
|
2495 |
|
|
\else \char'22 \fi
|
2496 |
|
|
\else \char'22 \fi
|
2497 |
|
|
}
|
2498 |
|
|
|
2499 |
|
|
% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
|
2500 |
|
|
\def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq}
|
2501 |
|
|
|
2502 |
|
|
% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
|
2503 |
|
|
\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
|
2504 |
|
|
|
2505 |
|
|
%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
|
2506 |
|
|
%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
|
2507 |
|
|
|
2508 |
|
|
% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
|
2509 |
|
|
% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
|
2510 |
|
|
\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else
|
2511 |
|
|
\ptexslash\fi\fi\fi}
|
2512 |
|
|
\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
|
2513 |
|
|
\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
|
2514 |
|
|
|
2515 |
|
|
% like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl.
|
2516 |
|
|
% @var is set to this for defun arguments.
|
2517 |
|
|
\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
|
2518 |
|
|
|
2519 |
|
|
% @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want
|
2520 |
|
|
% ttsl for book titles, do we?
|
2521 |
|
|
\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
|
2522 |
|
|
|
2523 |
|
|
\let\i=\smartitalic
|
2524 |
|
|
\let\slanted=\smartslanted
|
2525 |
|
|
\def\var#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\smartslanted{#1}}}
|
2526 |
|
|
\let\dfn=\smartslanted
|
2527 |
|
|
\let\emph=\smartitalic
|
2528 |
|
|
|
2529 |
|
|
% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
|
2530 |
|
|
\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
|
2531 |
|
|
\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
|
2532 |
|
|
\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
|
2533 |
|
|
|
2534 |
|
|
% @b, explicit bold. Also @strong.
|
2535 |
|
|
\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
|
2536 |
|
|
\let\strong=\b
|
2537 |
|
|
|
2538 |
|
|
% @sansserif, explicit sans.
|
2539 |
|
|
\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
|
2540 |
|
|
|
2541 |
|
|
% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
|
2542 |
|
|
% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
|
2543 |
|
|
% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
|
2544 |
|
|
%
|
2545 |
|
|
\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
|
2546 |
|
|
\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
|
2547 |
|
|
|
2548 |
|
|
% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
|
2549 |
|
|
% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
|
2550 |
|
|
% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
|
2551 |
|
|
%
|
2552 |
|
|
\catcode`@=11
|
2553 |
|
|
\def\plainfrenchspacing{%
|
2554 |
|
|
\sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
|
2555 |
|
|
\sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
|
2556 |
|
|
\def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
|
2557 |
|
|
}
|
2558 |
|
|
\def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
|
2559 |
|
|
\sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
|
2560 |
|
|
\sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
|
2561 |
|
|
\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
|
2562 |
|
|
}
|
2563 |
|
|
\catcode`@=\other
|
2564 |
|
|
\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
|
2565 |
|
|
|
2566 |
|
|
% @t, explicit typewriter.
|
2567 |
|
|
\def\t#1{%
|
2568 |
|
|
{\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
|
2569 |
|
|
\null
|
2570 |
|
|
}
|
2571 |
|
|
|
2572 |
|
|
% @samp.
|
2573 |
|
|
\def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}}
|
2574 |
|
|
|
2575 |
|
|
% definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size.
|
2576 |
|
|
%\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
2577 |
|
|
%\font\keysy=cmsy9
|
2578 |
|
|
%\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
|
2579 |
|
|
% \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
|
2580 |
|
|
% \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
|
2581 |
|
|
% \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
|
2582 |
|
|
% \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
|
2583 |
|
|
% \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
|
2584 |
|
|
|
2585 |
|
|
% definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already
|
2586 |
|
|
% monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But
|
2587 |
|
|
% if it isn't monospace, then use \tt.
|
2588 |
|
|
%
|
2589 |
|
|
\def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}%
|
2590 |
|
|
\nohyphenation
|
2591 |
|
|
\ifmonospace\else\tt\fi
|
2592 |
|
|
#1}\null}
|
2593 |
|
|
|
2594 |
|
|
% ctrl is no longer a Texinfo command.
|
2595 |
|
|
\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
|
2596 |
|
|
|
2597 |
|
|
% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
|
2598 |
|
|
\let\file=\samp
|
2599 |
|
|
\let\option=\samp
|
2600 |
|
|
|
2601 |
|
|
% @code is a modification of @t,
|
2602 |
|
|
% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
|
2603 |
|
|
\def\tclose#1{%
|
2604 |
|
|
{%
|
2605 |
|
|
% Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
|
2606 |
|
|
\spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
|
2607 |
|
|
%
|
2608 |
|
|
% Switch to typewriter.
|
2609 |
|
|
\tt
|
2610 |
|
|
%
|
2611 |
|
|
% But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
|
2612 |
|
|
\def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
|
2613 |
|
|
%
|
2614 |
|
|
% Turn off hyphenation.
|
2615 |
|
|
\nohyphenation
|
2616 |
|
|
%
|
2617 |
|
|
\rawbackslash
|
2618 |
|
|
\plainfrenchspacing
|
2619 |
|
|
#1%
|
2620 |
|
|
}%
|
2621 |
|
|
\null
|
2622 |
|
|
}
|
2623 |
|
|
|
2624 |
|
|
% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
|
2625 |
|
|
% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
|
2626 |
|
|
% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
|
2627 |
|
|
|
2628 |
|
|
% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
|
2629 |
|
|
% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
|
2630 |
|
|
% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
|
2631 |
|
|
% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
|
2632 |
|
|
% -- rms.
|
2633 |
|
|
{
|
2634 |
|
|
\catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
|
2635 |
|
|
\catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
|
2636 |
|
|
\global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions
|
2637 |
|
|
%
|
2638 |
|
|
\global\def\code{\begingroup
|
2639 |
|
|
\setupmarkupstyle{code}%
|
2640 |
|
|
% The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers.
|
2641 |
|
|
\catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active
|
2642 |
|
|
\ifallowcodebreaks
|
2643 |
|
|
\let-\codedash
|
2644 |
|
|
\let_\codeunder
|
2645 |
|
|
\else
|
2646 |
|
|
\let-\realdash
|
2647 |
|
|
\let_\realunder
|
2648 |
|
|
\fi
|
2649 |
|
|
\codex
|
2650 |
|
|
}
|
2651 |
|
|
}
|
2652 |
|
|
|
2653 |
|
|
\def\realdash{-}
|
2654 |
|
|
\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
|
2655 |
|
|
\def\codeunder{%
|
2656 |
|
|
% this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _
|
2657 |
|
|
% is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
|
2658 |
|
|
% will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
|
2659 |
|
|
% (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
|
2660 |
|
|
\ifusingtt{\ifmmode
|
2661 |
|
|
\mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
|
2662 |
|
|
\else\normalunderscore \fi
|
2663 |
|
|
\discretionary{}{}{}}%
|
2664 |
|
|
{\_}%
|
2665 |
|
|
}
|
2666 |
|
|
\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
|
2667 |
|
|
|
2668 |
|
|
% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
|
2669 |
|
|
% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is undesirable in
|
2670 |
|
|
% some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in
|
2671 |
|
|
% general. @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this.
|
2672 |
|
|
%
|
2673 |
|
|
\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue
|
2674 |
|
|
|
2675 |
|
|
\def\keywordtrue{true}
|
2676 |
|
|
\def\keywordfalse{false}
|
2677 |
|
|
|
2678 |
|
|
\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
|
2679 |
|
|
\def\txiarg{#1}%
|
2680 |
|
|
\ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
|
2681 |
|
|
\allowcodebreakstrue
|
2682 |
|
|
\else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
|
2683 |
|
|
\allowcodebreaksfalse
|
2684 |
|
|
\else
|
2685 |
|
|
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
2686 |
|
|
\errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg'}%
|
2687 |
|
|
\fi\fi
|
2688 |
|
|
}
|
2689 |
|
|
|
2690 |
|
|
% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
|
2691 |
|
|
% then @kbd has no effect.
|
2692 |
|
|
\def\kbd#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}}
|
2693 |
|
|
|
2694 |
|
|
% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
|
2695 |
|
|
% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
|
2696 |
|
|
% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
|
2697 |
|
|
\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
|
2698 |
|
|
\def\txiarg{#1}%
|
2699 |
|
|
\ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
|
2700 |
|
|
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
|
2701 |
|
|
\else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
|
2702 |
|
|
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
|
2703 |
|
|
\else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
|
2704 |
|
|
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
|
2705 |
|
|
\else
|
2706 |
|
|
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
2707 |
|
|
\errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\txiarg'}%
|
2708 |
|
|
\fi\fi\fi
|
2709 |
|
|
}
|
2710 |
|
|
\def\worddistinct{distinct}
|
2711 |
|
|
\def\wordexample{example}
|
2712 |
|
|
\def\wordcode{code}
|
2713 |
|
|
|
2714 |
|
|
% Default is `distinct'.
|
2715 |
|
|
\kbdinputstyle distinct
|
2716 |
|
|
|
2717 |
|
|
\def\xkey{\key}
|
2718 |
|
|
\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
|
2719 |
|
|
\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
|
2720 |
|
|
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
|
2721 |
|
|
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi}
|
2722 |
|
|
|
2723 |
|
|
% For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
|
2724 |
|
|
\let\indicateurl=\code
|
2725 |
|
|
\let\env=\code
|
2726 |
|
|
\let\command=\code
|
2727 |
|
|
|
2728 |
|
|
% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...}
|
2729 |
|
|
\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup}
|
2730 |
|
|
|
2731 |
|
|
% @clickstyle @arrow (by default)
|
2732 |
|
|
\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}}
|
2733 |
|
|
\def\click{\arrow}
|
2734 |
|
|
|
2735 |
|
|
% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
|
2736 |
|
|
% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
|
2737 |
|
|
% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
|
2738 |
|
|
% itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in
|
2739 |
|
|
% a hypertex \special here.
|
2740 |
|
|
%
|
2741 |
|
|
\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
|
2742 |
|
|
\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
|
2743 |
|
|
\unsepspaces
|
2744 |
|
|
\pdfurl{#1}%
|
2745 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
|
2746 |
|
|
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
|
2747 |
|
|
\unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
|
2748 |
|
|
\else
|
2749 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
2750 |
|
|
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
|
2751 |
|
|
\ifpdf
|
2752 |
|
|
\unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
|
2753 |
|
|
\else
|
2754 |
|
|
\unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
|
2755 |
|
|
\fi
|
2756 |
|
|
\else
|
2757 |
|
|
\code{#1}% only url given, so show it
|
2758 |
|
|
\fi
|
2759 |
|
|
\fi
|
2760 |
|
|
\endlink
|
2761 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
2762 |
|
|
|
2763 |
|
|
% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
|
2764 |
|
|
%
|
2765 |
|
|
\let\url=\uref
|
2766 |
|
|
|
2767 |
|
|
% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
|
2768 |
|
|
% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
|
2769 |
|
|
%
|
2770 |
|
|
%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
|
2771 |
|
|
\ifpdf
|
2772 |
|
|
\def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
|
2773 |
|
|
\def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
|
2774 |
|
|
\unsepspaces
|
2775 |
|
|
\pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
|
2776 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
2777 |
|
|
\ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
|
2778 |
|
|
\endlink
|
2779 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
2780 |
|
|
\else
|
2781 |
|
|
\let\email=\uref
|
2782 |
|
|
\fi
|
2783 |
|
|
|
2784 |
|
|
% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
|
2785 |
|
|
% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
|
2786 |
|
|
%
|
2787 |
|
|
\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
|
2788 |
|
|
|
2789 |
|
|
% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
|
2790 |
|
|
% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for
|
2791 |
|
|
% Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96.
|
2792 |
|
|
%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
|
2793 |
|
|
|
2794 |
|
|
% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
|
2795 |
|
|
% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
|
2796 |
|
|
% all-uppercase.
|
2797 |
|
|
%
|
2798 |
|
|
\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
|
2799 |
|
|
\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
|
2800 |
|
|
{\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
|
2801 |
|
|
\def\temp{#2}%
|
2802 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\empty \else
|
2803 |
|
|
\space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
|
2804 |
|
|
\fi
|
2805 |
|
|
}
|
2806 |
|
|
|
2807 |
|
|
% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
|
2808 |
|
|
% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
|
2809 |
|
|
%
|
2810 |
|
|
\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
|
2811 |
|
|
\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
|
2812 |
|
|
{\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
|
2813 |
|
|
\def\temp{#2}%
|
2814 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\empty \else
|
2815 |
|
|
\space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
|
2816 |
|
|
\fi
|
2817 |
|
|
}
|
2818 |
|
|
|
2819 |
|
|
|
2820 |
|
|
\message{glyphs,}
|
2821 |
|
|
|
2822 |
|
|
% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
|
2823 |
|
|
%
|
2824 |
|
|
% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of
|
2825 |
|
|
% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
|
2826 |
|
|
%
|
2827 |
|
|
\def\point{$\star$}
|
2828 |
|
|
\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}}
|
2829 |
|
|
\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
|
2830 |
|
|
\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
|
2831 |
|
|
\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
|
2832 |
|
|
\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
|
2833 |
|
|
|
2834 |
|
|
% The @error{} command.
|
2835 |
|
|
% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
|
2836 |
|
|
%
|
2837 |
|
|
\newbox\errorbox
|
2838 |
|
|
%
|
2839 |
|
|
{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
|
2840 |
|
|
\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
|
2841 |
|
|
% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
|
2842 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf error\kern-1.5pt}
|
2843 |
|
|
%
|
2844 |
|
|
\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
|
2845 |
|
|
\hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
|
2846 |
|
|
\advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
|
2847 |
|
|
\vbox{%
|
2848 |
|
|
\hrule height\dimen2
|
2849 |
|
|
\hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
|
2850 |
|
|
\vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
|
2851 |
|
|
\kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
|
2852 |
|
|
\hrule height\dimen2}
|
2853 |
|
|
\hfil}
|
2854 |
|
|
%
|
2855 |
|
|
\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
|
2856 |
|
|
|
2857 |
|
|
% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
|
2858 |
|
|
%
|
2859 |
|
|
\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
|
2860 |
|
|
|
2861 |
|
|
% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
|
2862 |
|
|
% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
|
2863 |
|
|
% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
|
2864 |
|
|
% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
|
2865 |
|
|
% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
|
2866 |
|
|
%
|
2867 |
|
|
% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
|
2868 |
|
|
% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
|
2869 |
|
|
% font height.
|
2870 |
|
|
%
|
2871 |
|
|
% feymr - regular
|
2872 |
|
|
% feymo - slanted
|
2873 |
|
|
% feybr - bold
|
2874 |
|
|
% feybo - bold slanted
|
2875 |
|
|
%
|
2876 |
|
|
% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
|
2877 |
|
|
% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
|
2878 |
|
|
% Hmm.
|
2879 |
|
|
%
|
2880 |
|
|
% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
|
2881 |
|
|
% Hope not.
|
2882 |
|
|
%
|
2883 |
|
|
%
|
2884 |
|
|
\def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
|
2885 |
|
|
\def\eurofont{%
|
2886 |
|
|
% We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
|
2887 |
|
|
% \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
|
2888 |
|
|
% installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
|
2889 |
|
|
% font installed.
|
2890 |
|
|
%
|
2891 |
|
|
% There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
|
2892 |
|
|
% that to the current nominal size.
|
2893 |
|
|
%
|
2894 |
|
|
% By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
|
2895 |
|
|
% does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
|
2896 |
|
|
%
|
2897 |
|
|
\def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
|
2898 |
|
|
%
|
2899 |
|
|
\ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
|
2900 |
|
|
% bold:
|
2901 |
|
|
\font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
|
2902 |
|
|
\else
|
2903 |
|
|
% regular:
|
2904 |
|
|
\font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
|
2905 |
|
|
\fi
|
2906 |
|
|
\thiseurofont
|
2907 |
|
|
}
|
2908 |
|
|
|
2909 |
|
|
% Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because
|
2910 |
|
|
% sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect
|
2911 |
|
|
% the redefinition.
|
2912 |
|
|
%
|
2913 |
|
|
% Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters.
|
2914 |
|
|
\def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth
|
2915 |
|
|
\def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth
|
2916 |
|
|
\def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn
|
2917 |
|
|
\def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn
|
2918 |
|
|
%
|
2919 |
|
|
\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}}
|
2920 |
|
|
\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft}
|
2921 |
|
|
\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}}
|
2922 |
|
|
\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright}
|
2923 |
|
|
\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}}
|
2924 |
|
|
\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}}
|
2925 |
|
|
\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}}
|
2926 |
|
|
\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}}
|
2927 |
|
|
%
|
2928 |
|
|
% This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but
|
2929 |
|
|
% we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the
|
2930 |
|
|
% tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer
|
2931 |
|
|
% dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc.
|
2932 |
|
|
%
|
2933 |
|
|
% ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using
|
2934 |
|
|
% the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in
|
2935 |
|
|
% the same EC font.
|
2936 |
|
|
\def\ogonek#1{{%
|
2937 |
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
2938 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek
|
2939 |
|
|
\else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek
|
2940 |
|
|
\else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek
|
2941 |
|
|
\else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek
|
2942 |
|
|
\else
|
2943 |
|
|
\ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
|
2944 |
|
|
\ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1%
|
2945 |
|
|
\else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}%
|
2946 |
|
|
\fi
|
2947 |
|
|
\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
2948 |
|
|
}%
|
2949 |
|
|
}
|
2950 |
|
|
\def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A}
|
2951 |
|
|
\def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a}
|
2952 |
|
|
\def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E}
|
2953 |
|
|
\def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e}
|
2954 |
|
|
%
|
2955 |
|
|
% Use the ec* fonts (cm-super in outline format) for non-CM glyphs.
|
2956 |
|
|
\def\ecfont{%
|
2957 |
|
|
% We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this
|
2958 |
|
|
% is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German
|
2959 |
|
|
% quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so
|
2960 |
|
|
% hopefully nobody will notice/care.
|
2961 |
|
|
\edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}%
|
2962 |
|
|
\edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
|
2963 |
|
|
\ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
|
2964 |
|
|
% bold:
|
2965 |
|
|
\font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
|
2966 |
|
|
\else
|
2967 |
|
|
% regular:
|
2968 |
|
|
\font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
|
2969 |
|
|
\fi
|
2970 |
|
|
\thisecfont
|
2971 |
|
|
}
|
2972 |
|
|
|
2973 |
|
|
% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really
|
2974 |
|
|
% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
|
2975 |
|
|
% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
|
2976 |
|
|
%
|
2977 |
|
|
\def\registeredsymbol{%
|
2978 |
|
|
$^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
|
2979 |
|
|
\hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
|
2980 |
|
|
}$%
|
2981 |
|
|
}
|
2982 |
|
|
|
2983 |
|
|
% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign.
|
2984 |
|
|
%
|
2985 |
|
|
\def\textdegree{$^\circ$}
|
2986 |
|
|
|
2987 |
|
|
% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
|
2988 |
|
|
% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38
|
2989 |
|
|
% so we'll define it if necessary.
|
2990 |
|
|
%
|
2991 |
|
|
\ifx\Orb\undefined
|
2992 |
|
|
\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
|
2993 |
|
|
\fi
|
2994 |
|
|
|
2995 |
|
|
% Quotes.
|
2996 |
|
|
\chardef\quotedblleft="5C
|
2997 |
|
|
\chardef\quotedblright=`\"
|
2998 |
|
|
\chardef\quoteleft=`\`
|
2999 |
|
|
\chardef\quoteright=`\'
|
3000 |
|
|
|
3001 |
|
|
|
3002 |
|
|
\message{page headings,}
|
3003 |
|
|
|
3004 |
|
|
\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
|
3005 |
|
|
\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
|
3006 |
|
|
|
3007 |
|
|
% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
|
3008 |
|
|
\newif\ifseenauthor
|
3009 |
|
|
\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
|
3010 |
|
|
|
3011 |
|
|
% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
|
3012 |
|
|
% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
|
3013 |
|
|
%
|
3014 |
|
|
\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
|
3015 |
|
|
\let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
|
3016 |
|
|
\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
|
3017 |
|
|
\let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
|
3018 |
|
|
|
3019 |
|
|
\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
|
3020 |
|
|
\endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
|
3021 |
|
|
|
3022 |
|
|
\envdef\titlepage{%
|
3023 |
|
|
% Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
|
3024 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
3025 |
|
|
\parindent=0pt \textfonts
|
3026 |
|
|
% Leave some space at the very top of the page.
|
3027 |
|
|
\vglue\titlepagetopglue
|
3028 |
|
|
% No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
|
3029 |
|
|
\finishedtitlepagetrue
|
3030 |
|
|
%
|
3031 |
|
|
% Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
|
3032 |
|
|
% at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
|
3033 |
|
|
\let\oldpage = \page
|
3034 |
|
|
\def\page{%
|
3035 |
|
|
\iffinishedtitlepage\else
|
3036 |
|
|
\finishtitlepage
|
3037 |
|
|
\fi
|
3038 |
|
|
\let\page = \oldpage
|
3039 |
|
|
\page
|
3040 |
|
|
\null
|
3041 |
|
|
}%
|
3042 |
|
|
}
|
3043 |
|
|
|
3044 |
|
|
\def\Etitlepage{%
|
3045 |
|
|
\iffinishedtitlepage\else
|
3046 |
|
|
\finishtitlepage
|
3047 |
|
|
\fi
|
3048 |
|
|
% It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
|
3049 |
|
|
% because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
|
3050 |
|
|
% If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
|
3051 |
|
|
% after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
|
3052 |
|
|
\oldpage
|
3053 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
3054 |
|
|
%
|
3055 |
|
|
% Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
|
3056 |
|
|
% in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
|
3057 |
|
|
\HEADINGSon
|
3058 |
|
|
%
|
3059 |
|
|
% If they want short, they certainly want long too.
|
3060 |
|
|
\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
|
3061 |
|
|
\shortcontents
|
3062 |
|
|
\contents
|
3063 |
|
|
\global\let\shortcontents = \relax
|
3064 |
|
|
\global\let\contents = \relax
|
3065 |
|
|
\fi
|
3066 |
|
|
%
|
3067 |
|
|
\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
|
3068 |
|
|
\contents
|
3069 |
|
|
\global\let\contents = \relax
|
3070 |
|
|
\global\let\shortcontents = \relax
|
3071 |
|
|
\fi
|
3072 |
|
|
}
|
3073 |
|
|
|
3074 |
|
|
\def\finishtitlepage{%
|
3075 |
|
|
\vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
|
3076 |
|
|
\vskip\titlepagebottomglue
|
3077 |
|
|
\finishedtitlepagetrue
|
3078 |
|
|
}
|
3079 |
|
|
|
3080 |
|
|
%%% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
|
3081 |
|
|
|
3082 |
|
|
\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
|
3083 |
|
|
\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
|
3084 |
|
|
|
3085 |
|
|
\parseargdef\title{%
|
3086 |
|
|
\checkenv\titlepage
|
3087 |
|
|
\leftline{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}
|
3088 |
|
|
% print a rule at the page bottom also.
|
3089 |
|
|
\finishedtitlepagefalse
|
3090 |
|
|
\vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
|
3091 |
|
|
}
|
3092 |
|
|
|
3093 |
|
|
\parseargdef\subtitle{%
|
3094 |
|
|
\checkenv\titlepage
|
3095 |
|
|
{\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
|
3096 |
|
|
}
|
3097 |
|
|
|
3098 |
|
|
% @author should come last, but may come many times.
|
3099 |
|
|
% It can also be used inside @quotation.
|
3100 |
|
|
%
|
3101 |
|
|
\parseargdef\author{%
|
3102 |
|
|
\def\temp{\quotation}%
|
3103 |
|
|
\ifx\thisenv\temp
|
3104 |
|
|
\def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
|
3105 |
|
|
\else
|
3106 |
|
|
\checkenv\titlepage
|
3107 |
|
|
\ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
|
3108 |
|
|
{\secfonts\rmisbold \leftline{#1}}%
|
3109 |
|
|
\fi
|
3110 |
|
|
}
|
3111 |
|
|
|
3112 |
|
|
|
3113 |
|
|
%%% Set up page headings and footings.
|
3114 |
|
|
|
3115 |
|
|
\let\thispage=\folio
|
3116 |
|
|
|
3117 |
|
|
\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
|
3118 |
|
|
\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
|
3119 |
|
|
\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
|
3120 |
|
|
\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
|
3121 |
|
|
|
3122 |
|
|
% Now make TeX use those variables
|
3123 |
|
|
\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
|
3124 |
|
|
\else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
|
3125 |
|
|
\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
|
3126 |
|
|
\else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
|
3127 |
|
|
\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
|
3128 |
|
|
|
3129 |
|
|
% Commands to set those variables.
|
3130 |
|
|
% For example, this is what @headings on does
|
3131 |
|
|
% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
|
3132 |
|
|
% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
|
3133 |
|
|
% @evenfooting @thisfile||
|
3134 |
|
|
% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
|
3135 |
|
|
|
3136 |
|
|
|
3137 |
|
|
\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
|
3138 |
|
|
\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
|
3139 |
|
|
\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
|
3140 |
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
3141 |
|
|
|
3142 |
|
|
\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
|
3143 |
|
|
\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
|
3144 |
|
|
\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
|
3145 |
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
3146 |
|
|
|
3147 |
|
|
\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
|
3148 |
|
|
|
3149 |
|
|
\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
|
3150 |
|
|
\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
|
3151 |
|
|
\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
|
3152 |
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
3153 |
|
|
|
3154 |
|
|
\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
|
3155 |
|
|
\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
|
3156 |
|
|
\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
|
3157 |
|
|
\global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
|
3158 |
|
|
%
|
3159 |
|
|
% Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
|
3160 |
|
|
% @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
|
3161 |
|
|
\global\advance\pageheight by -12pt
|
3162 |
|
|
\global\advance\vsize by -12pt
|
3163 |
|
|
}
|
3164 |
|
|
|
3165 |
|
|
\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
|
3166 |
|
|
|
3167 |
|
|
% @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page
|
3168 |
|
|
% @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page
|
3169 |
|
|
%
|
3170 |
|
|
% The same set of arguments for:
|
3171 |
|
|
%
|
3172 |
|
|
% @oddheadingmarks
|
3173 |
|
|
% @evenfootingmarks
|
3174 |
|
|
% @oddfootingmarks
|
3175 |
|
|
% @everyheadingmarks
|
3176 |
|
|
% @everyfootingmarks
|
3177 |
|
|
|
3178 |
|
|
\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}}
|
3179 |
|
|
\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}}
|
3180 |
|
|
\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}}
|
3181 |
|
|
\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}}
|
3182 |
|
|
\def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1}
|
3183 |
|
|
\headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} }
|
3184 |
|
|
\def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1}
|
3185 |
|
|
\headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} }
|
3186 |
|
|
% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom.
|
3187 |
|
|
\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {%
|
3188 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname
|
3189 |
|
|
\global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp
|
3190 |
|
|
}
|
3191 |
|
|
|
3192 |
|
|
\everyheadingmarks bottom
|
3193 |
|
|
\everyfootingmarks bottom
|
3194 |
|
|
|
3195 |
|
|
% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
|
3196 |
|
|
% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
|
3197 |
|
|
% @headings off turns them off.
|
3198 |
|
|
% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
|
3199 |
|
|
% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
|
3200 |
|
|
% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
|
3201 |
|
|
% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
|
3202 |
|
|
% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
|
3203 |
|
|
% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
|
3204 |
|
|
|
3205 |
|
|
\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
|
3206 |
|
|
|
3207 |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSoff{%
|
3208 |
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
3209 |
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
|
3210 |
|
|
\HEADINGSoff
|
3211 |
|
|
% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
|
3212 |
|
|
% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
|
3213 |
|
|
% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
|
3214 |
|
|
% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
|
3215 |
|
|
% edge of all pages.
|
3216 |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSdouble{%
|
3217 |
|
|
\global\pageno=1
|
3218 |
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
3219 |
|
|
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
3220 |
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
|
3221 |
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
3222 |
|
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
3223 |
|
|
}
|
3224 |
|
|
\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
3225 |
|
|
|
3226 |
|
|
% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
|
3227 |
|
|
% page number on top right.
|
3228 |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSsingle{%
|
3229 |
|
|
\global\pageno=1
|
3230 |
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
3231 |
|
|
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
3232 |
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
3233 |
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
3234 |
|
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
3235 |
|
|
}
|
3236 |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
|
3237 |
|
|
|
3238 |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
|
3239 |
|
|
\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
|
3240 |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
|
3241 |
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
3242 |
|
|
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
3243 |
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
|
3244 |
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
3245 |
|
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
3246 |
|
|
}
|
3247 |
|
|
|
3248 |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
|
3249 |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
|
3250 |
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
3251 |
|
|
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
3252 |
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
3253 |
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
3254 |
|
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
3255 |
|
|
}
|
3256 |
|
|
|
3257 |
|
|
% Subroutines used in generating headings
|
3258 |
|
|
% This produces Day Month Year style of output.
|
3259 |
|
|
% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
|
3260 |
|
|
% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
|
3261 |
|
|
\ifx\today\undefined
|
3262 |
|
|
\def\today{%
|
3263 |
|
|
\number\day\space
|
3264 |
|
|
\ifcase\month
|
3265 |
|
|
\or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
|
3266 |
|
|
\or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
|
3267 |
|
|
\or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
|
3268 |
|
|
\fi
|
3269 |
|
|
\space\number\year}
|
3270 |
|
|
\fi
|
3271 |
|
|
|
3272 |
|
|
% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
|
3273 |
|
|
% It generates no output of its own.
|
3274 |
|
|
\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
|
3275 |
|
|
\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
|
3276 |
|
|
|
3277 |
|
|
|
3278 |
|
|
\message{tables,}
|
3279 |
|
|
% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
|
3280 |
|
|
|
3281 |
|
|
% default indentation of table text
|
3282 |
|
|
\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
|
3283 |
|
|
% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
|
3284 |
|
|
\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
|
3285 |
|
|
% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
|
3286 |
|
|
\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
|
3287 |
|
|
|
3288 |
|
|
% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
|
3289 |
|
|
\newdimen\itemmax
|
3290 |
|
|
|
3291 |
|
|
% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
|
3292 |
|
|
% these defs.
|
3293 |
|
|
% They also define \itemindex
|
3294 |
|
|
% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
|
3295 |
|
|
|
3296 |
|
|
\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
|
3297 |
|
|
|
3298 |
|
|
\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
|
3299 |
|
|
|
3300 |
|
|
\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
|
3301 |
|
|
\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
|
3302 |
|
|
|
3303 |
|
|
\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
|
3304 |
|
|
\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
|
3305 |
|
|
\advance\hsize by -\tableindent
|
3306 |
|
|
\setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
|
3307 |
|
|
\itemindex{#1}%
|
3308 |
|
|
\nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
|
3309 |
|
|
%
|
3310 |
|
|
% If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
|
3311 |
|
|
% by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
|
3312 |
|
|
% line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
|
3313 |
|
|
% command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
|
3314 |
|
|
% horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
|
3315 |
|
|
\ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
|
3316 |
|
|
%
|
3317 |
|
|
% Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
|
3318 |
|
|
% but leave it ragged-right.
|
3319 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
3320 |
|
|
\advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
|
3321 |
|
|
\advance\hsize by\tableindent
|
3322 |
|
|
\advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
|
3323 |
|
|
\leavevmode\unhbox0\par
|
3324 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
3325 |
|
|
%
|
3326 |
|
|
% We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
|
3327 |
|
|
% \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
|
3328 |
|
|
\nobreak \vskip-\parskip
|
3329 |
|
|
%
|
3330 |
|
|
% Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if
|
3331 |
|
|
% what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
|
3332 |
|
|
% \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
|
3333 |
|
|
% cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this
|
3334 |
|
|
% bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
|
3335 |
|
|
% \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also.
|
3336 |
|
|
%
|
3337 |
|
|
\penalty 10001
|
3338 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
3339 |
|
|
\itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
|
3340 |
|
|
\else
|
3341 |
|
|
% The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
|
3342 |
|
|
% following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
|
3343 |
|
|
\noindent
|
3344 |
|
|
% Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
|
3345 |
|
|
% the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
|
3346 |
|
|
% eventually be printed.
|
3347 |
|
|
\nobreak\kern-\tableindent
|
3348 |
|
|
\dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
|
3349 |
|
|
\unhbox0
|
3350 |
|
|
\nobreak\kern\dimen0
|
3351 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
3352 |
|
|
\itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
|
3353 |
|
|
\fi
|
3354 |
|
|
}
|
3355 |
|
|
|
3356 |
|
|
\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
|
3357 |
|
|
\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
|
3358 |
|
|
|
3359 |
|
|
% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
|
3360 |
|
|
\envdef\table{%
|
3361 |
|
|
\let\itemindex\gobble
|
3362 |
|
|
\tablecheck{table}%
|
3363 |
|
|
}
|
3364 |
|
|
\envdef\ftable{%
|
3365 |
|
|
\def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
|
3366 |
|
|
\tablecheck{ftable}%
|
3367 |
|
|
}
|
3368 |
|
|
\envdef\vtable{%
|
3369 |
|
|
\def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
|
3370 |
|
|
\tablecheck{vtable}%
|
3371 |
|
|
}
|
3372 |
|
|
\def\tablecheck#1{%
|
3373 |
|
|
\ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
|
3374 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
3375 |
|
|
\errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
|
3376 |
|
|
that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
|
3377 |
|
|
\def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
|
3378 |
|
|
\else
|
3379 |
|
|
\let\next\tablex
|
3380 |
|
|
\fi
|
3381 |
|
|
\next
|
3382 |
|
|
}
|
3383 |
|
|
\def\tablex#1{%
|
3384 |
|
|
\def\itemindicate{#1}%
|
3385 |
|
|
\parsearg\tabley
|
3386 |
|
|
}
|
3387 |
|
|
\def\tabley#1{%
|
3388 |
|
|
{%
|
3389 |
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
3390 |
|
|
\edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
|
3391 |
|
|
\expandafter
|
3392 |
|
|
}\temp \endtablez
|
3393 |
|
|
}
|
3394 |
|
|
\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
|
3395 |
|
|
\aboveenvbreak
|
3396 |
|
|
\ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
|
3397 |
|
|
\ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
|
3398 |
|
|
\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
|
3399 |
|
|
\itemmax=\tableindent
|
3400 |
|
|
\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
|
3401 |
|
|
\advance \leftskip by \tableindent
|
3402 |
|
|
\exdentamount=\tableindent
|
3403 |
|
|
\parindent = 0pt
|
3404 |
|
|
\parskip = \smallskipamount
|
3405 |
|
|
\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
|
3406 |
|
|
\let\item = \internalBitem
|
3407 |
|
|
\let\itemx = \internalBitemx
|
3408 |
|
|
}
|
3409 |
|
|
\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
|
3410 |
|
|
\let\Eftable\Etable
|
3411 |
|
|
\let\Evtable\Etable
|
3412 |
|
|
\let\Eitemize\Etable
|
3413 |
|
|
\let\Eenumerate\Etable
|
3414 |
|
|
|
3415 |
|
|
% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
|
3416 |
|
|
|
3417 |
|
|
\newcount \itemno
|
3418 |
|
|
|
3419 |
|
|
\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
|
3420 |
|
|
|
3421 |
|
|
\def\doitemize#1{%
|
3422 |
|
|
\aboveenvbreak
|
3423 |
|
|
\itemmax=\itemindent
|
3424 |
|
|
\advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
|
3425 |
|
|
\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
|
3426 |
|
|
\exdentamount=\itemindent
|
3427 |
|
|
\parindent=0pt
|
3428 |
|
|
\parskip=\smallskipamount
|
3429 |
|
|
\ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
|
3430 |
|
|
%
|
3431 |
|
|
% Try typesetting the item mark that if the document erroneously says
|
3432 |
|
|
% something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error
|
3433 |
|
|
% right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the
|
3434 |
|
|
% world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if
|
3435 |
|
|
% the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w.
|
3436 |
|
|
\def\itemcontents{#1}%
|
3437 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}%
|
3438 |
|
|
%
|
3439 |
|
|
% @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
|
3440 |
|
|
\ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
|
3441 |
|
|
%
|
3442 |
|
|
\let\item=\itemizeitem
|
3443 |
|
|
}
|
3444 |
|
|
|
3445 |
|
|
% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
|
3446 |
|
|
%
|
3447 |
|
|
\def\itemizeitem{%
|
3448 |
|
|
\advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations
|
3449 |
|
|
{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
|
3450 |
|
|
{%
|
3451 |
|
|
% If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
|
3452 |
|
|
% \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
|
3453 |
|
|
% done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero
|
3454 |
|
|
% parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the
|
3455 |
|
|
% other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
|
3456 |
|
|
% usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
|
3457 |
|
|
% space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least
|
3458 |
|
|
% that's the theory.
|
3459 |
|
|
\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
|
3460 |
|
|
\noindent
|
3461 |
|
|
\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
|
3462 |
|
|
%
|
3463 |
|
|
\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
|
3464 |
|
|
\flushcr
|
3465 |
|
|
}
|
3466 |
|
|
|
3467 |
|
|
% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
|
3468 |
|
|
% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
|
3469 |
|
|
%
|
3470 |
|
|
\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
|
3471 |
|
|
|
3472 |
|
|
% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
|
3473 |
|
|
% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
|
3474 |
|
|
% argument is the same as `1'.
|
3475 |
|
|
%
|
3476 |
|
|
\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
|
3477 |
|
|
\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
|
3478 |
|
|
% If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
|
3479 |
|
|
\def\thearg{#1}%
|
3480 |
|
|
\ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
|
3481 |
|
|
%
|
3482 |
|
|
% Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
|
3483 |
|
|
% letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
|
3484 |
|
|
% (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
|
3485 |
|
|
% This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
|
3486 |
|
|
% all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
|
3487 |
|
|
\expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
|
3488 |
|
|
\ifx\rest\empty
|
3489 |
|
|
% Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
|
3490 |
|
|
% A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
|
3491 |
|
|
% An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
|
3492 |
|
|
% not equal to itself.
|
3493 |
|
|
% Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
|
3494 |
|
|
%
|
3495 |
|
|
% We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
|
3496 |
|
|
% continuing to look for a <number>.
|
3497 |
|
|
%
|
3498 |
|
|
\ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
|
3499 |
|
|
\numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
|
3500 |
|
|
\else
|
3501 |
|
|
% It's a letter.
|
3502 |
|
|
\ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
|
3503 |
|
|
\lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
|
3504 |
|
|
\else
|
3505 |
|
|
\uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
|
3506 |
|
|
\fi
|
3507 |
|
|
\fi
|
3508 |
|
|
\else
|
3509 |
|
|
% Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
|
3510 |
|
|
\numericenumerate
|
3511 |
|
|
\fi
|
3512 |
|
|
}
|
3513 |
|
|
|
3514 |
|
|
% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
|
3515 |
|
|
% given in \thearg.
|
3516 |
|
|
%
|
3517 |
|
|
\def\numericenumerate{%
|
3518 |
|
|
\itemno = \thearg
|
3519 |
|
|
\startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
|
3520 |
|
|
}
|
3521 |
|
|
|
3522 |
|
|
% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
|
3523 |
|
|
\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
|
3524 |
|
|
\itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
|
3525 |
|
|
\startenumeration{%
|
3526 |
|
|
% Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
|
3527 |
|
|
\ifnum\itemno=0
|
3528 |
|
|
\errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
|
3529 |
|
|
alphabet}%
|
3530 |
|
|
\fi
|
3531 |
|
|
\char\lccode\itemno
|
3532 |
|
|
}%
|
3533 |
|
|
}
|
3534 |
|
|
|
3535 |
|
|
% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
|
3536 |
|
|
\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
|
3537 |
|
|
\itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
|
3538 |
|
|
\startenumeration{%
|
3539 |
|
|
% Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
|
3540 |
|
|
\ifnum\itemno=0
|
3541 |
|
|
\errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
|
3542 |
|
|
alphabet}
|
3543 |
|
|
\fi
|
3544 |
|
|
\char\uccode\itemno
|
3545 |
|
|
}%
|
3546 |
|
|
}
|
3547 |
|
|
|
3548 |
|
|
% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
|
3549 |
|
|
% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
|
3550 |
|
|
% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
|
3551 |
|
|
%
|
3552 |
|
|
\def\startenumeration#1{%
|
3553 |
|
|
\advance\itemno by -1
|
3554 |
|
|
\doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
|
3555 |
|
|
}
|
3556 |
|
|
|
3557 |
|
|
% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
|
3558 |
|
|
% to @enumerate.
|
3559 |
|
|
%
|
3560 |
|
|
\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
|
3561 |
|
|
\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
|
3562 |
|
|
\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
|
3563 |
|
|
\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
|
3564 |
|
|
|
3565 |
|
|
|
3566 |
|
|
% @multitable macros
|
3567 |
|
|
% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
|
3568 |
|
|
%
|
3569 |
|
|
% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
|
3570 |
|
|
% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
|
3571 |
|
|
% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
|
3572 |
|
|
% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
|
3573 |
|
|
|
3574 |
|
|
% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
|
3575 |
|
|
|
3576 |
|
|
% To make preamble:
|
3577 |
|
|
%
|
3578 |
|
|
% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
|
3579 |
|
|
% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
|
3580 |
|
|
% @item ...
|
3581 |
|
|
%
|
3582 |
|
|
% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
|
3583 |
|
|
% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
|
3584 |
|
|
% columns as desired.
|
3585 |
|
|
|
3586 |
|
|
|
3587 |
|
|
% Or use a template:
|
3588 |
|
|
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
|
3589 |
|
|
% @item ...
|
3590 |
|
|
% using the widest term desired in each column.
|
3591 |
|
|
|
3592 |
|
|
% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
|
3593 |
|
|
% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
|
3594 |
|
|
% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
|
3595 |
|
|
% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
|
3596 |
|
|
|
3597 |
|
|
% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
|
3598 |
|
|
% if they are.
|
3599 |
|
|
|
3600 |
|
|
% Sample multitable:
|
3601 |
|
|
|
3602 |
|
|
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
|
3603 |
|
|
% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
|
3604 |
|
|
% @item
|
3605 |
|
|
% first col stuff
|
3606 |
|
|
% @tab
|
3607 |
|
|
% second col stuff
|
3608 |
|
|
% @tab
|
3609 |
|
|
% third col
|
3610 |
|
|
% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
|
3611 |
|
|
% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
|
3612 |
|
|
%
|
3613 |
|
|
% They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
|
3614 |
|
|
% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
|
3615 |
|
|
% @end multitable
|
3616 |
|
|
|
3617 |
|
|
% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
|
3618 |
|
|
% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
|
3619 |
|
|
% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
|
3620 |
|
|
% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
|
3621 |
|
|
% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
|
3622 |
|
|
% to baseline.
|
3623 |
|
|
% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
|
3624 |
|
|
%
|
3625 |
|
|
\newskip\multitableparskip
|
3626 |
|
|
\newskip\multitableparindent
|
3627 |
|
|
\newdimen\multitablecolspace
|
3628 |
|
|
\newskip\multitablelinespace
|
3629 |
|
|
\multitableparskip=0pt
|
3630 |
|
|
\multitableparindent=6pt
|
3631 |
|
|
\multitablecolspace=12pt
|
3632 |
|
|
\multitablelinespace=0pt
|
3633 |
|
|
|
3634 |
|
|
% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
|
3635 |
|
|
%
|
3636 |
|
|
\let\endsetuptable\relax
|
3637 |
|
|
\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
|
3638 |
|
|
\let\columnfractions\relax
|
3639 |
|
|
\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
|
3640 |
|
|
\newif\ifsetpercent
|
3641 |
|
|
|
3642 |
|
|
% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
|
3643 |
|
|
% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is.
|
3644 |
|
|
%
|
3645 |
|
|
\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
|
3646 |
|
|
\global\advance\colcount by 1
|
3647 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
|
3648 |
|
|
\setuptable
|
3649 |
|
|
}
|
3650 |
|
|
|
3651 |
|
|
\newcount\colcount
|
3652 |
|
|
\def\setuptable#1{%
|
3653 |
|
|
\def\firstarg{#1}%
|
3654 |
|
|
\ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
|
3655 |
|
|
\let\go = \relax
|
3656 |
|
|
\else
|
3657 |
|
|
\ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
|
3658 |
|
|
\global\setpercenttrue
|
3659 |
|
|
\else
|
3660 |
|
|
\ifsetpercent
|
3661 |
|
|
\let\go\pickupwholefraction
|
3662 |
|
|
\else
|
3663 |
|
|
\global\advance\colcount by 1
|
3664 |
|
|
\setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
|
3665 |
|
|
% separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
|
3666 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
|
3667 |
|
|
\fi
|
3668 |
|
|
\fi
|
3669 |
|
|
\ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
|
3670 |
|
|
% Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
|
3671 |
|
|
% we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
|
3672 |
|
|
\def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
|
3673 |
|
|
\else
|
3674 |
|
|
\let\go = \setuptable
|
3675 |
|
|
\fi%
|
3676 |
|
|
\fi
|
3677 |
|
|
\go
|
3678 |
|
|
}
|
3679 |
|
|
|
3680 |
|
|
% multitable-only commands.
|
3681 |
|
|
%
|
3682 |
|
|
% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
|
3683 |
|
|
% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
|
3684 |
|
|
% of an alignment entry. \everycr resets \everytab so we don't have to
|
3685 |
|
|
% undo it ourselves.
|
3686 |
|
|
\def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable
|
3687 |
|
|
\def\headitem{%
|
3688 |
|
|
\checkenv\multitable
|
3689 |
|
|
\crcr
|
3690 |
|
|
\global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs
|
3691 |
|
|
\the\everytab % for the first item
|
3692 |
|
|
}%
|
3693 |
|
|
%
|
3694 |
|
|
% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template
|
3695 |
|
|
% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until
|
3696 |
|
|
% we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve.
|
3697 |
|
|
% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
|
3698 |
|
|
\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
|
3699 |
|
|
|
3700 |
|
|
% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
|
3701 |
|
|
%
|
3702 |
|
|
\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab.
|
3703 |
|
|
%
|
3704 |
|
|
\envdef\multitable{%
|
3705 |
|
|
\vskip\parskip
|
3706 |
|
|
\startsavinginserts
|
3707 |
|
|
%
|
3708 |
|
|
% @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
|
3709 |
|
|
% We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
|
3710 |
|
|
% contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
|
3711 |
|
|
% \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
|
3712 |
|
|
\def\item{\crcr}%
|
3713 |
|
|
%
|
3714 |
|
|
\tolerance=9500
|
3715 |
|
|
\hbadness=9500
|
3716 |
|
|
\setmultitablespacing
|
3717 |
|
|
\parskip=\multitableparskip
|
3718 |
|
|
\parindent=\multitableparindent
|
3719 |
|
|
\overfullrule=0pt
|
3720 |
|
|
\global\colcount=0
|
3721 |
|
|
%
|
3722 |
|
|
\everycr = {%
|
3723 |
|
|
\noalign{%
|
3724 |
|
|
\global\everytab={}%
|
3725 |
|
|
\global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
|
3726 |
|
|
% Check for saved footnotes, etc.
|
3727 |
|
|
\checkinserts
|
3728 |
|
|
% Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
|
3729 |
|
|
%\filbreak
|
3730 |
|
|
% Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
|
3731 |
|
|
% table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the
|
3732 |
|
|
% problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
|
3733 |
|
|
}%
|
3734 |
|
|
}%
|
3735 |
|
|
%
|
3736 |
|
|
\parsearg\domultitable
|
3737 |
|
|
}
|
3738 |
|
|
\def\domultitable#1{%
|
3739 |
|
|
% To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
|
3740 |
|
|
\setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
|
3741 |
|
|
%
|
3742 |
|
|
% This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
|
3743 |
|
|
% be used as many times as user calls for columns.
|
3744 |
|
|
% \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
|
3745 |
|
|
% continue for many paragraphs if desired.
|
3746 |
|
|
\halign\bgroup &%
|
3747 |
|
|
\global\advance\colcount by 1
|
3748 |
|
|
\multistrut
|
3749 |
|
|
\vtop{%
|
3750 |
|
|
% Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
|
3751 |
|
|
\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
|
3752 |
|
|
%
|
3753 |
|
|
% In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
|
3754 |
|
|
% we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
|
3755 |
|
|
% the first one.
|
3756 |
|
|
%
|
3757 |
|
|
% If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
|
3758 |
|
|
% to the width of each template entry.
|
3759 |
|
|
%
|
3760 |
|
|
% If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
|
3761 |
|
|
% use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
|
3762 |
|
|
% will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
|
3763 |
|
|
% left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
|
3764 |
|
|
%
|
3765 |
|
|
% Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
|
3766 |
|
|
\rightskip=0pt
|
3767 |
|
|
\ifnum\colcount=1
|
3768 |
|
|
% The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
|
3769 |
|
|
\advance\hsize by\leftskip
|
3770 |
|
|
\else
|
3771 |
|
|
\ifsetpercent \else
|
3772 |
|
|
% If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
|
3773 |
|
|
% we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
|
3774 |
|
|
\advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
|
3775 |
|
|
\fi
|
3776 |
|
|
% In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
|
3777 |
|
|
\leftskip=\multitablecolspace
|
3778 |
|
|
\fi
|
3779 |
|
|
% Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
|
3780 |
|
|
% blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
|
3781 |
|
|
% box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
|
3782 |
|
|
% For example:
|
3783 |
|
|
% @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
|
3784 |
|
|
% @item @code{#}
|
3785 |
|
|
% @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
|
3786 |
|
|
% Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
|
3787 |
|
|
% marking characters.
|
3788 |
|
|
\noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
|
3789 |
|
|
}\cr
|
3790 |
|
|
}
|
3791 |
|
|
\def\Emultitable{%
|
3792 |
|
|
\crcr
|
3793 |
|
|
\egroup % end the \halign
|
3794 |
|
|
\global\setpercentfalse
|
3795 |
|
|
}
|
3796 |
|
|
|
3797 |
|
|
\def\setmultitablespacing{%
|
3798 |
|
|
\def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
|
3799 |
|
|
%
|
3800 |
|
|
% Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
|
3801 |
|
|
% \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on
|
3802 |
|
|
% this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
|
3803 |
|
|
% See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
|
3804 |
|
|
\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
|
3805 |
|
|
\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
|
3806 |
|
|
\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
|
3807 |
|
|
\fi
|
3808 |
|
|
%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
|
3809 |
|
|
%% table. If not, do nothing.
|
3810 |
|
|
%% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
|
3811 |
|
|
\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
|
3812 |
|
|
\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
|
3813 |
|
|
\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
|
3814 |
|
|
%% than skip between lines in the table.
|
3815 |
|
|
\fi%
|
3816 |
|
|
\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
|
3817 |
|
|
\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
|
3818 |
|
|
\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
|
3819 |
|
|
%% than skip between lines in the table.
|
3820 |
|
|
\fi}
|
3821 |
|
|
|
3822 |
|
|
|
3823 |
|
|
\message{conditionals,}
|
3824 |
|
|
|
3825 |
|
|
% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
|
3826 |
|
|
% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't
|
3827 |
|
|
% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we
|
3828 |
|
|
% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
|
3829 |
|
|
% attempt to close an environment group.
|
3830 |
|
|
%
|
3831 |
|
|
\def\makecond#1{%
|
3832 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
|
3833 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
|
3834 |
|
|
}
|
3835 |
|
|
\makecond{iftex}
|
3836 |
|
|
\makecond{ifnotdocbook}
|
3837 |
|
|
\makecond{ifnothtml}
|
3838 |
|
|
\makecond{ifnotinfo}
|
3839 |
|
|
\makecond{ifnotplaintext}
|
3840 |
|
|
\makecond{ifnotxml}
|
3841 |
|
|
|
3842 |
|
|
% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
|
3843 |
|
|
%
|
3844 |
|
|
\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
|
3845 |
|
|
\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
|
3846 |
|
|
\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
|
3847 |
|
|
\def\html{\doignore{html}}
|
3848 |
|
|
\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
|
3849 |
|
|
\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
|
3850 |
|
|
\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
|
3851 |
|
|
\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
|
3852 |
|
|
\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
|
3853 |
|
|
\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
|
3854 |
|
|
\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
|
3855 |
|
|
\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
|
3856 |
|
|
\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
|
3857 |
|
|
|
3858 |
|
|
% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
|
3859 |
|
|
%
|
3860 |
|
|
% A count to remember the depth of nesting.
|
3861 |
|
|
\newcount\doignorecount
|
3862 |
|
|
|
3863 |
|
|
\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
|
3864 |
|
|
% Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
|
3865 |
|
|
\obeylines
|
3866 |
|
|
\catcode`\@ = \other
|
3867 |
|
|
\catcode`\{ = \other
|
3868 |
|
|
\catcode`\} = \other
|
3869 |
|
|
%
|
3870 |
|
|
% Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
|
3871 |
|
|
\spaceisspace
|
3872 |
|
|
%
|
3873 |
|
|
% Count number of #1's that we've seen.
|
3874 |
|
|
\doignorecount = 0
|
3875 |
|
|
%
|
3876 |
|
|
% Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
|
3877 |
|
|
\dodoignore{#1}%
|
3878 |
|
|
}
|
3879 |
|
|
|
3880 |
|
|
{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
|
3881 |
|
|
\obeylines %
|
3882 |
|
|
%
|
3883 |
|
|
\gdef\dodoignore#1{%
|
3884 |
|
|
% #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
|
3885 |
|
|
%
|
3886 |
|
|
% Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
|
3887 |
|
|
\long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{%
|
3888 |
|
|
\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
|
3889 |
|
|
%
|
3890 |
|
|
% And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
|
3891 |
|
|
% line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
|
3892 |
|
|
% example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
|
3893 |
|
|
\long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
|
3894 |
|
|
%
|
3895 |
|
|
% And now expand that command.
|
3896 |
|
|
\doignoretext ^^M%
|
3897 |
|
|
}%
|
3898 |
|
|
}
|
3899 |
|
|
|
3900 |
|
|
\def\doignoreyyy#1{%
|
3901 |
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
3902 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found.
|
3903 |
|
|
\let\next\doignoretextzzz
|
3904 |
|
|
\else % Found a nested condition, ...
|
3905 |
|
|
\advance\doignorecount by 1
|
3906 |
|
|
\let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another.
|
3907 |
|
|
% If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
|
3908 |
|
|
\fi
|
3909 |
|
|
\next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
|
3910 |
|
|
}
|
3911 |
|
|
|
3912 |
|
|
% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
|
3913 |
|
|
%
|
3914 |
|
|
\def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
|
3915 |
|
|
\ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end.
|
3916 |
|
|
\let\next\enddoignore
|
3917 |
|
|
\else % Still inside a nested condition.
|
3918 |
|
|
\advance\doignorecount by -1
|
3919 |
|
|
\let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end.
|
3920 |
|
|
\fi
|
3921 |
|
|
\next
|
3922 |
|
|
}
|
3923 |
|
|
|
3924 |
|
|
% Finish off ignored text.
|
3925 |
|
|
{ \obeylines%
|
3926 |
|
|
% Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
|
3927 |
|
|
% environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
|
3928 |
|
|
% would result in a blank line in the output.
|
3929 |
|
|
\gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
|
3930 |
|
|
}
|
3931 |
|
|
|
3932 |
|
|
|
3933 |
|
|
% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
|
3934 |
|
|
% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
|
3935 |
|
|
%
|
3936 |
|
|
% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
|
3937 |
|
|
% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
|
3938 |
|
|
% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
|
3939 |
|
|
% didn't need it.
|
3940 |
|
|
% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
|
3941 |
|
|
%
|
3942 |
|
|
\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
|
3943 |
|
|
\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
|
3944 |
|
|
{%
|
3945 |
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
3946 |
|
|
\def\temp{#2}%
|
3947 |
|
|
\edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
|
3948 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\empty
|
3949 |
|
|
\next{}%
|
3950 |
|
|
\else
|
3951 |
|
|
\setzzz#2\endsetzzz
|
3952 |
|
|
\fi
|
3953 |
|
|
}%
|
3954 |
|
|
}
|
3955 |
|
|
% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
|
3956 |
|
|
\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
|
3957 |
|
|
|
3958 |
|
|
% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
|
3959 |
|
|
%
|
3960 |
|
|
\parseargdef\clear{%
|
3961 |
|
|
{%
|
3962 |
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
3963 |
|
|
\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
|
3964 |
|
|
}%
|
3965 |
|
|
}
|
3966 |
|
|
|
3967 |
|
|
% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
|
3968 |
|
|
\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
|
3969 |
|
|
\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
|
3970 |
|
|
{
|
3971 |
|
|
\catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active
|
3972 |
|
|
%
|
3973 |
|
|
\gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
|
3974 |
|
|
\let\value = \expandablevalue
|
3975 |
|
|
% We don't want these characters active, ...
|
3976 |
|
|
\catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
|
3977 |
|
|
% ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
|
3978 |
|
|
% we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
|
3979 |
|
|
% So \let them to their normal equivalents.
|
3980 |
|
|
\let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore
|
3981 |
|
|
}
|
3982 |
|
|
}
|
3983 |
|
|
|
3984 |
|
|
% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
|
3985 |
|
|
% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
|
3986 |
|
|
% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
|
3987 |
|
|
% the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the
|
3988 |
|
|
% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
|
3989 |
|
|
% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
|
3990 |
|
|
% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
|
3991 |
|
|
%
|
3992 |
|
|
\def\expandablevalue#1{%
|
3993 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
|
3994 |
|
|
{[No value for ``#1'']}%
|
3995 |
|
|
\message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
|
3996 |
|
|
\else
|
3997 |
|
|
\csname SET#1\endcsname
|
3998 |
|
|
\fi
|
3999 |
|
|
}
|
4000 |
|
|
|
4001 |
|
|
% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
|
4002 |
|
|
% with @set.
|
4003 |
|
|
%
|
4004 |
|
|
% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine.
|
4005 |
|
|
%
|
4006 |
|
|
\makecond{ifset}
|
4007 |
|
|
\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
|
4008 |
|
|
\def\doifset#1#2{%
|
4009 |
|
|
{%
|
4010 |
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
4011 |
|
|
\let\next=\empty
|
4012 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
|
4013 |
|
|
#1% If not set, redefine \next.
|
4014 |
|
|
\fi
|
4015 |
|
|
\expandafter
|
4016 |
|
|
}\next
|
4017 |
|
|
}
|
4018 |
|
|
\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
|
4019 |
|
|
|
4020 |
|
|
% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
|
4021 |
|
|
% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
|
4022 |
|
|
%
|
4023 |
|
|
% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
|
4024 |
|
|
% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
|
4025 |
|
|
% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
|
4026 |
|
|
%
|
4027 |
|
|
\makecond{ifclear}
|
4028 |
|
|
\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
|
4029 |
|
|
\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
|
4030 |
|
|
|
4031 |
|
|
% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
|
4032 |
|
|
% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
|
4033 |
|
|
\let\dircategory=\comment
|
4034 |
|
|
|
4035 |
|
|
% @defininfoenclose.
|
4036 |
|
|
\let\definfoenclose=\comment
|
4037 |
|
|
|
4038 |
|
|
|
4039 |
|
|
\message{indexing,}
|
4040 |
|
|
% Index generation facilities
|
4041 |
|
|
|
4042 |
|
|
% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
|
4043 |
|
|
% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
|
4044 |
|
|
\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
|
4045 |
|
|
|
4046 |
|
|
% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
|
4047 |
|
|
% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
|
4048 |
|
|
% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
|
4049 |
|
|
% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
|
4050 |
|
|
% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo.
|
4051 |
|
|
% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
|
4052 |
|
|
% for the sake of vms.
|
4053 |
|
|
%
|
4054 |
|
|
\def\newindex#1{%
|
4055 |
|
|
\iflinks
|
4056 |
|
|
\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
|
4057 |
|
|
\openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
|
4058 |
|
|
\fi
|
4059 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
|
4060 |
|
|
\noexpand\doindex{#1}}
|
4061 |
|
|
}
|
4062 |
|
|
|
4063 |
|
|
% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
|
4064 |
|
|
%
|
4065 |
|
|
\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
|
4066 |
|
|
|
4067 |
|
|
% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
|
4068 |
|
|
%
|
4069 |
|
|
\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
|
4070 |
|
|
%
|
4071 |
|
|
\def\newcodeindex#1{%
|
4072 |
|
|
\iflinks
|
4073 |
|
|
\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
|
4074 |
|
|
\openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
|
4075 |
|
|
\fi
|
4076 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
|
4077 |
|
|
\noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
|
4078 |
|
|
}
|
4079 |
|
|
|
4080 |
|
|
|
4081 |
|
|
% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
|
4082 |
|
|
% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
|
4083 |
|
|
%
|
4084 |
|
|
% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
|
4085 |
|
|
% inside @code.
|
4086 |
|
|
%
|
4087 |
|
|
\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
|
4088 |
|
|
\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
|
4089 |
|
|
|
4090 |
|
|
% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
|
4091 |
|
|
% #3 the target index (bar).
|
4092 |
|
|
\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
|
4093 |
|
|
% Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
|
4094 |
|
|
% closing the target index.
|
4095 |
|
|
\expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \relax
|
4096 |
|
|
% The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
|
4097 |
|
|
% Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
|
4098 |
|
|
\expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
|
4099 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
|
4100 |
|
|
\fi
|
4101 |
|
|
% redefine \fooindfile:
|
4102 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
|
4103 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
|
4104 |
|
|
% redefine \fooindex:
|
4105 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
|
4106 |
|
|
}
|
4107 |
|
|
|
4108 |
|
|
% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
|
4109 |
|
|
% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
|
4110 |
|
|
% and it is "foo", the name of the index.
|
4111 |
|
|
|
4112 |
|
|
% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
|
4113 |
|
|
% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
|
4114 |
|
|
|
4115 |
|
|
% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
|
4116 |
|
|
% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
|
4117 |
|
|
|
4118 |
|
|
\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
|
4119 |
|
|
\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
|
4120 |
|
|
|
4121 |
|
|
% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
|
4122 |
|
|
\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
|
4123 |
|
|
\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
|
4124 |
|
|
|
4125 |
|
|
% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
|
4126 |
|
|
% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
|
4127 |
|
|
% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
|
4128 |
|
|
%
|
4129 |
|
|
\def\indexdummies{%
|
4130 |
|
|
\escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files.
|
4131 |
|
|
\def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
|
4132 |
|
|
\def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
|
4133 |
|
|
%
|
4134 |
|
|
% Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
|
4135 |
|
|
% But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
|
4136 |
|
|
% braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
|
4137 |
|
|
\let\{ = \mylbrace
|
4138 |
|
|
\let\} = \myrbrace
|
4139 |
|
|
%
|
4140 |
|
|
% I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is
|
4141 |
|
|
% generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts
|
4142 |
|
|
% causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is,
|
4143 |
|
|
% apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput
|
4144 |
|
|
% is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput
|
4145 |
|
|
% disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that
|
4146 |
|
|
% processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it
|
4147 |
|
|
% seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that
|
4148 |
|
|
% is still getting written without apparent harm.
|
4149 |
|
|
%
|
4150 |
|
|
% Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to
|
4151 |
|
|
% help-texinfo, 22may06):
|
4152 |
|
|
% @macro funindex {WORD}
|
4153 |
|
|
% @findex xyz
|
4154 |
|
|
% @end macro
|
4155 |
|
|
% ...
|
4156 |
|
|
% @funindex commtest
|
4157 |
|
|
%
|
4158 |
|
|
% The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor.
|
4159 |
|
|
%
|
4160 |
|
|
% Sample whatsit resulting:
|
4161 |
|
|
% .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}}
|
4162 |
|
|
%
|
4163 |
|
|
% So:
|
4164 |
|
|
\let\endinput = \empty
|
4165 |
|
|
%
|
4166 |
|
|
% Do the redefinitions.
|
4167 |
|
|
\commondummies
|
4168 |
|
|
}
|
4169 |
|
|
|
4170 |
|
|
% For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to
|
4171 |
|
|
% redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of
|
4172 |
|
|
% \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @,
|
4173 |
|
|
% this will be simpler.
|
4174 |
|
|
%
|
4175 |
|
|
\def\atdummies{%
|
4176 |
|
|
\def\@{@@}%
|
4177 |
|
|
\def\ {@ }%
|
4178 |
|
|
\let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
|
4179 |
|
|
\let\} = \rbraceatcmd
|
4180 |
|
|
%
|
4181 |
|
|
% Do the redefinitions.
|
4182 |
|
|
\commondummies
|
4183 |
|
|
\otherbackslash
|
4184 |
|
|
}
|
4185 |
|
|
|
4186 |
|
|
% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.
|
4187 |
|
|
%
|
4188 |
|
|
\def\commondummies{%
|
4189 |
|
|
%
|
4190 |
|
|
% \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
|
4191 |
|
|
% preventing its expansion. This is used only for control% words,
|
4192 |
|
|
% not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
|
4193 |
|
|
% control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
|
4194 |
|
|
% from whatever follows.
|
4195 |
|
|
%
|
4196 |
|
|
% For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
|
4197 |
|
|
% space.
|
4198 |
|
|
%
|
4199 |
|
|
% These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
|
4200 |
|
|
% those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
|
4201 |
|
|
% that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
|
4202 |
|
|
%
|
4203 |
|
|
\def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}%
|
4204 |
|
|
\def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}%
|
4205 |
|
|
\let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
|
4206 |
|
|
%
|
4207 |
|
|
\commondummiesnofonts
|
4208 |
|
|
%
|
4209 |
|
|
\definedummyletter\_%
|
4210 |
|
|
%
|
4211 |
|
|
% Non-English letters.
|
4212 |
|
|
\definedummyword\AA
|
4213 |
|
|
\definedummyword\AE
|
4214 |
|
|
\definedummyword\DH
|
4215 |
|
|
\definedummyword\L
|
4216 |
|
|
\definedummyword\O
|
4217 |
|
|
\definedummyword\OE
|
4218 |
|
|
\definedummyword\TH
|
4219 |
|
|
\definedummyword\aa
|
4220 |
|
|
\definedummyword\ae
|
4221 |
|
|
\definedummyword\dh
|
4222 |
|
|
\definedummyword\exclamdown
|
4223 |
|
|
\definedummyword\l
|
4224 |
|
|
\definedummyword\o
|
4225 |
|
|
\definedummyword\oe
|
4226 |
|
|
\definedummyword\ordf
|
4227 |
|
|
\definedummyword\ordm
|
4228 |
|
|
\definedummyword\questiondown
|
4229 |
|
|
\definedummyword\ss
|
4230 |
|
|
\definedummyword\th
|
4231 |
|
|
%
|
4232 |
|
|
% Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
|
4233 |
|
|
\definedummyword\bf
|
4234 |
|
|
\definedummyword\gtr
|
4235 |
|
|
\definedummyword\hat
|
4236 |
|
|
\definedummyword\less
|
4237 |
|
|
\definedummyword\sf
|
4238 |
|
|
\definedummyword\sl
|
4239 |
|
|
\definedummyword\tclose
|
4240 |
|
|
\definedummyword\tt
|
4241 |
|
|
%
|
4242 |
|
|
\definedummyword\LaTeX
|
4243 |
|
|
\definedummyword\TeX
|
4244 |
|
|
%
|
4245 |
|
|
% Assorted special characters.
|
4246 |
|
|
\definedummyword\bullet
|
4247 |
|
|
\definedummyword\comma
|
4248 |
|
|
\definedummyword\copyright
|
4249 |
|
|
\definedummyword\registeredsymbol
|
4250 |
|
|
\definedummyword\dots
|
4251 |
|
|
\definedummyword\enddots
|
4252 |
|
|
\definedummyword\equiv
|
4253 |
|
|
\definedummyword\error
|
4254 |
|
|
\definedummyword\euro
|
4255 |
|
|
\definedummyword\guillemetleft
|
4256 |
|
|
\definedummyword\guillemetright
|
4257 |
|
|
\definedummyword\guilsinglleft
|
4258 |
|
|
\definedummyword\guilsinglright
|
4259 |
|
|
\definedummyword\expansion
|
4260 |
|
|
\definedummyword\minus
|
4261 |
|
|
\definedummyword\ogonek
|
4262 |
|
|
\definedummyword\pounds
|
4263 |
|
|
\definedummyword\point
|
4264 |
|
|
\definedummyword\print
|
4265 |
|
|
\definedummyword\quotedblbase
|
4266 |
|
|
\definedummyword\quotedblleft
|
4267 |
|
|
\definedummyword\quotedblright
|
4268 |
|
|
\definedummyword\quoteleft
|
4269 |
|
|
\definedummyword\quoteright
|
4270 |
|
|
\definedummyword\quotesinglbase
|
4271 |
|
|
\definedummyword\result
|
4272 |
|
|
\definedummyword\textdegree
|
4273 |
|
|
%
|
4274 |
|
|
% We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
|
4275 |
|
|
\macrolist
|
4276 |
|
|
%
|
4277 |
|
|
\normalturnoffactive
|
4278 |
|
|
%
|
4279 |
|
|
% Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
|
4280 |
|
|
% (non-fully-expandable) commands.
|
4281 |
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
4282 |
|
|
}
|
4283 |
|
|
|
4284 |
|
|
% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
|
4285 |
|
|
%
|
4286 |
|
|
\def\commondummiesnofonts{%
|
4287 |
|
|
% Control letters and accents.
|
4288 |
|
|
\definedummyletter\!%
|
4289 |
|
|
\definedummyaccent\"%
|
4290 |
|
|
\definedummyaccent\'%
|
4291 |
|
|
\definedummyletter\*%
|
4292 |
|
|
\definedummyaccent\,%
|
4293 |
|
|
\definedummyletter\.%
|
4294 |
|
|
\definedummyletter\/%
|
4295 |
|
|
\definedummyletter\:%
|
4296 |
|
|
\definedummyaccent\=%
|
4297 |
|
|
\definedummyletter\?%
|
4298 |
|
|
\definedummyaccent\^%
|
4299 |
|
|
\definedummyaccent\`%
|
4300 |
|
|
\definedummyaccent\~%
|
4301 |
|
|
\definedummyword\u
|
4302 |
|
|
\definedummyword\v
|
4303 |
|
|
\definedummyword\H
|
4304 |
|
|
\definedummyword\dotaccent
|
4305 |
|
|
\definedummyword\ogonek
|
4306 |
|
|
\definedummyword\ringaccent
|
4307 |
|
|
\definedummyword\tieaccent
|
4308 |
|
|
\definedummyword\ubaraccent
|
4309 |
|
|
\definedummyword\udotaccent
|
4310 |
|
|
\definedummyword\dotless
|
4311 |
|
|
%
|
4312 |
|
|
% Texinfo font commands.
|
4313 |
|
|
\definedummyword\b
|
4314 |
|
|
\definedummyword\i
|
4315 |
|
|
\definedummyword\r
|
4316 |
|
|
\definedummyword\sc
|
4317 |
|
|
\definedummyword\t
|
4318 |
|
|
%
|
4319 |
|
|
% Commands that take arguments.
|
4320 |
|
|
\definedummyword\acronym
|
4321 |
|
|
\definedummyword\cite
|
4322 |
|
|
\definedummyword\code
|
4323 |
|
|
\definedummyword\command
|
4324 |
|
|
\definedummyword\dfn
|
4325 |
|
|
\definedummyword\emph
|
4326 |
|
|
\definedummyword\env
|
4327 |
|
|
\definedummyword\file
|
4328 |
|
|
\definedummyword\kbd
|
4329 |
|
|
\definedummyword\key
|
4330 |
|
|
\definedummyword\math
|
4331 |
|
|
\definedummyword\option
|
4332 |
|
|
\definedummyword\pxref
|
4333 |
|
|
\definedummyword\ref
|
4334 |
|
|
\definedummyword\samp
|
4335 |
|
|
\definedummyword\strong
|
4336 |
|
|
\definedummyword\tie
|
4337 |
|
|
\definedummyword\uref
|
4338 |
|
|
\definedummyword\url
|
4339 |
|
|
\definedummyword\var
|
4340 |
|
|
\definedummyword\verb
|
4341 |
|
|
\definedummyword\w
|
4342 |
|
|
\definedummyword\xref
|
4343 |
|
|
}
|
4344 |
|
|
|
4345 |
|
|
% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
|
4346 |
|
|
% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all
|
4347 |
|
|
% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
|
4348 |
|
|
% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
|
4349 |
|
|
%
|
4350 |
|
|
\def\indexnofonts{%
|
4351 |
|
|
% Accent commands should become @asis.
|
4352 |
|
|
\def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}%
|
4353 |
|
|
% We can just ignore other control letters.
|
4354 |
|
|
\def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}%
|
4355 |
|
|
% Hopefully, all control words can become @asis.
|
4356 |
|
|
\let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
|
4357 |
|
|
%
|
4358 |
|
|
\commondummiesnofonts
|
4359 |
|
|
%
|
4360 |
|
|
% Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
|
4361 |
|
|
% and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
|
4362 |
|
|
% Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
|
4363 |
|
|
%\let\tt=\asis
|
4364 |
|
|
%
|
4365 |
|
|
\def\ { }%
|
4366 |
|
|
\def\@{@}%
|
4367 |
|
|
% how to handle braces?
|
4368 |
|
|
\def\_{\normalunderscore}%
|
4369 |
|
|
%
|
4370 |
|
|
% Non-English letters.
|
4371 |
|
|
\def\AA{AA}%
|
4372 |
|
|
\def\AE{AE}%
|
4373 |
|
|
\def\DH{DZZ}%
|
4374 |
|
|
\def\L{L}%
|
4375 |
|
|
\def\OE{OE}%
|
4376 |
|
|
\def\O{O}%
|
4377 |
|
|
\def\TH{ZZZ}%
|
4378 |
|
|
\def\aa{aa}%
|
4379 |
|
|
\def\ae{ae}%
|
4380 |
|
|
\def\dh{dzz}%
|
4381 |
|
|
\def\exclamdown{!}%
|
4382 |
|
|
\def\l{l}%
|
4383 |
|
|
\def\oe{oe}%
|
4384 |
|
|
\def\ordf{a}%
|
4385 |
|
|
\def\ordm{o}%
|
4386 |
|
|
\def\o{o}%
|
4387 |
|
|
\def\questiondown{?}%
|
4388 |
|
|
\def\ss{ss}%
|
4389 |
|
|
\def\th{zzz}%
|
4390 |
|
|
%
|
4391 |
|
|
\def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
|
4392 |
|
|
\def\TeX{TeX}%
|
4393 |
|
|
%
|
4394 |
|
|
% Assorted special characters.
|
4395 |
|
|
% (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
|
4396 |
|
|
\def\bullet{bullet}%
|
4397 |
|
|
\def\comma{,}%
|
4398 |
|
|
\def\copyright{copyright}%
|
4399 |
|
|
\def\dots{...}%
|
4400 |
|
|
\def\enddots{...}%
|
4401 |
|
|
\def\equiv{==}%
|
4402 |
|
|
\def\error{error}%
|
4403 |
|
|
\def\euro{euro}%
|
4404 |
|
|
\def\expansion{==>}%
|
4405 |
|
|
\def\guillemetleft{<<}%
|
4406 |
|
|
\def\guillemetright{>>}%
|
4407 |
|
|
\def\guilsinglleft{<}%
|
4408 |
|
|
\def\guilsinglright{>}%
|
4409 |
|
|
\def\minus{-}%
|
4410 |
|
|
\def\point{.}%
|
4411 |
|
|
\def\pounds{pounds}%
|
4412 |
|
|
\def\print{-|}%
|
4413 |
|
|
\def\quotedblbase{"}%
|
4414 |
|
|
\def\quotedblleft{"}%
|
4415 |
|
|
\def\quotedblright{"}%
|
4416 |
|
|
\def\quoteleft{`}%
|
4417 |
|
|
\def\quoteright{'}%
|
4418 |
|
|
\def\quotesinglbase{,}%
|
4419 |
|
|
\def\registeredsymbol{R}%
|
4420 |
|
|
\def\result{=>}%
|
4421 |
|
|
\def\textdegree{o}%
|
4422 |
|
|
%
|
4423 |
|
|
% We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
|
4424 |
|
|
% Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
|
4425 |
|
|
% makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up
|
4426 |
|
|
% writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry
|
4427 |
|
|
% that starts with \.
|
4428 |
|
|
%
|
4429 |
|
|
% Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
|
4430 |
|
|
% to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that
|
4431 |
|
|
% goes to end-of-line is not handled.
|
4432 |
|
|
%
|
4433 |
|
|
\macrolist
|
4434 |
|
|
}
|
4435 |
|
|
|
4436 |
|
|
\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex.
|
4437 |
|
|
\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
|
4438 |
|
|
|
4439 |
|
|
% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
|
4440 |
|
|
% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
|
4441 |
|
|
\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
|
4442 |
|
|
|
4443 |
|
|
% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
|
4444 |
|
|
% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
|
4445 |
|
|
% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
|
4446 |
|
|
% is with most defuns, which call us directly).
|
4447 |
|
|
%
|
4448 |
|
|
\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
|
4449 |
|
|
\iflinks
|
4450 |
|
|
{%
|
4451 |
|
|
% Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
|
4452 |
|
|
\toks0 = {#2}%
|
4453 |
|
|
% If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
|
4454 |
|
|
\def\thirdarg{#3}%
|
4455 |
|
|
\ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
|
4456 |
|
|
\toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
|
4457 |
|
|
\fi
|
4458 |
|
|
%
|
4459 |
|
|
\edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
|
4460 |
|
|
%
|
4461 |
|
|
\safewhatsit\dosubindwrite
|
4462 |
|
|
}%
|
4463 |
|
|
\fi
|
4464 |
|
|
}
|
4465 |
|
|
|
4466 |
|
|
% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
|
4467 |
|
|
%
|
4468 |
|
|
\def\dosubindwrite{%
|
4469 |
|
|
% Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
|
4470 |
|
|
\ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
|
4471 |
|
|
\insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
|
4472 |
|
|
\fi
|
4473 |
|
|
%
|
4474 |
|
|
% Remember, we are within a group.
|
4475 |
|
|
\indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
|
4476 |
|
|
\def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
|
4477 |
|
|
% so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
|
4478 |
|
|
%
|
4479 |
|
|
% Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
|
4480 |
|
|
% get the string to sort by.
|
4481 |
|
|
{\indexnofonts
|
4482 |
|
|
\edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
|
4483 |
|
|
\xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
|
4484 |
|
|
}%
|
4485 |
|
|
%
|
4486 |
|
|
% Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
|
4487 |
|
|
% the original text, including any font commands. We write
|
4488 |
|
|
% three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
|
4489 |
|
|
% subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
|
4490 |
|
|
% sorted result.
|
4491 |
|
|
\edef\temp{%
|
4492 |
|
|
\write\writeto{%
|
4493 |
|
|
\string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
|
4494 |
|
|
}%
|
4495 |
|
|
\temp
|
4496 |
|
|
}
|
4497 |
|
|
|
4498 |
|
|
% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit:
|
4499 |
|
|
%
|
4500 |
|
|
% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
|
4501 |
|
|
% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
|
4502 |
|
|
% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
|
4503 |
|
|
% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that
|
4504 |
|
|
% sequences like this:
|
4505 |
|
|
% @end defun
|
4506 |
|
|
% @tindex whatever
|
4507 |
|
|
% @defun ...
|
4508 |
|
|
% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
|
4509 |
|
|
% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
|
4510 |
|
|
% the previous defun.
|
4511 |
|
|
%
|
4512 |
|
|
% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
|
4513 |
|
|
% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
|
4514 |
|
|
%
|
4515 |
|
|
% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
|
4516 |
|
|
%
|
4517 |
|
|
% But wait, there is a catch there:
|
4518 |
|
|
% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not
|
4519 |
|
|
% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
|
4520 |
|
|
% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual
|
4521 |
|
|
% representation of the skip.
|
4522 |
|
|
%
|
4523 |
|
|
% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
|
4524 |
|
|
% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
|
4525 |
|
|
%
|
4526 |
|
|
\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
|
4527 |
|
|
%
|
4528 |
|
|
\newskip\whatsitskip
|
4529 |
|
|
\newcount\whatsitpenalty
|
4530 |
|
|
%
|
4531 |
|
|
% ..., ready, GO:
|
4532 |
|
|
%
|
4533 |
|
|
\def\safewhatsit#1{%
|
4534 |
|
|
\ifhmode
|
4535 |
|
|
#1%
|
4536 |
|
|
\else
|
4537 |
|
|
% \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
|
4538 |
|
|
\whatsitskip = \lastskip
|
4539 |
|
|
\edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
|
4540 |
|
|
\whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty
|
4541 |
|
|
%
|
4542 |
|
|
% If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
|
4543 |
|
|
% skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this
|
4544 |
|
|
% -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a
|
4545 |
|
|
% non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
|
4546 |
|
|
% breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
|
4547 |
|
|
\ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
|
4548 |
|
|
\else
|
4549 |
|
|
\vskip-\whatsitskip
|
4550 |
|
|
\fi
|
4551 |
|
|
%
|
4552 |
|
|
#1%
|
4553 |
|
|
%
|
4554 |
|
|
\ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
|
4555 |
|
|
% If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
|
4556 |
|
|
% perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want
|
4557 |
|
|
% to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
|
4558 |
|
|
% signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
|
4559 |
|
|
% following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example:
|
4560 |
|
|
%
|
4561 |
|
|
% @deffn deffn-whatever
|
4562 |
|
|
% @vindex index-whatever
|
4563 |
|
|
% Description.
|
4564 |
|
|
% would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
|
4565 |
|
|
% and the "Description." paragraph.
|
4566 |
|
|
\ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi
|
4567 |
|
|
\else
|
4568 |
|
|
% On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
|
4569 |
|
|
% this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
|
4570 |
|
|
% (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
|
4571 |
|
|
\nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip
|
4572 |
|
|
\fi
|
4573 |
|
|
\fi
|
4574 |
|
|
}
|
4575 |
|
|
|
4576 |
|
|
% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
|
4577 |
|
|
% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
|
4578 |
|
|
% or
|
4579 |
|
|
% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
|
4580 |
|
|
% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
|
4581 |
|
|
% containing these kinds of lines:
|
4582 |
|
|
% \initial {c}
|
4583 |
|
|
% before the first topic whose initial is c
|
4584 |
|
|
% \entry {topic}{pagelist}
|
4585 |
|
|
% for a topic that is used without subtopics
|
4586 |
|
|
% \primary {topic}
|
4587 |
|
|
% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
|
4588 |
|
|
% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
|
4589 |
|
|
% for each subtopic.
|
4590 |
|
|
|
4591 |
|
|
% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
|
4592 |
|
|
% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
|
4593 |
|
|
|
4594 |
|
|
\def\findex {\fnindex}
|
4595 |
|
|
\def\kindex {\kyindex}
|
4596 |
|
|
\def\cindex {\cpindex}
|
4597 |
|
|
\def\vindex {\vrindex}
|
4598 |
|
|
\def\tindex {\tpindex}
|
4599 |
|
|
\def\pindex {\pgindex}
|
4600 |
|
|
|
4601 |
|
|
\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
|
4602 |
|
|
{\obeylines %
|
4603 |
|
|
\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
|
4604 |
|
|
\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
|
4605 |
|
|
|
4606 |
|
|
% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
|
4607 |
|
|
|
4608 |
|
|
% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
|
4609 |
|
|
% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
|
4610 |
|
|
%
|
4611 |
|
|
\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
|
4612 |
|
|
\dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
|
4613 |
|
|
%
|
4614 |
|
|
\smallfonts \rm
|
4615 |
|
|
\tolerance = 9500
|
4616 |
|
|
\plainfrenchspacing
|
4617 |
|
|
\everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
|
4618 |
|
|
%
|
4619 |
|
|
% See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
|
4620 |
|
|
% Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
|
4621 |
|
|
% \initial {@}
|
4622 |
|
|
% as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
|
4623 |
|
|
% (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
|
4624 |
|
|
\catcode`\@ = 11
|
4625 |
|
|
\openin 1 \jobname.#1s
|
4626 |
|
|
\ifeof 1
|
4627 |
|
|
% \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
|
4628 |
|
|
% and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
|
4629 |
|
|
% index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
|
4630 |
|
|
% there is some text.
|
4631 |
|
|
\putwordIndexNonexistent
|
4632 |
|
|
\else
|
4633 |
|
|
%
|
4634 |
|
|
% If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
|
4635 |
|
|
% false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
|
4636 |
|
|
% it can discover if there is anything in it.
|
4637 |
|
|
\read 1 to \temp
|
4638 |
|
|
\ifeof 1
|
4639 |
|
|
\putwordIndexIsEmpty
|
4640 |
|
|
\else
|
4641 |
|
|
% Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
|
4642 |
|
|
% character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
|
4643 |
|
|
% to make right now.
|
4644 |
|
|
\def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
|
4645 |
|
|
\catcode`\\ = 0
|
4646 |
|
|
\escapechar = `\\
|
4647 |
|
|
\begindoublecolumns
|
4648 |
|
|
\input \jobname.#1s
|
4649 |
|
|
\enddoublecolumns
|
4650 |
|
|
\fi
|
4651 |
|
|
\fi
|
4652 |
|
|
\closein 1
|
4653 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
4654 |
|
|
|
4655 |
|
|
% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
|
4656 |
|
|
% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
|
4657 |
|
|
|
4658 |
|
|
\def\initial#1{{%
|
4659 |
|
|
% Some minor font changes for the special characters.
|
4660 |
|
|
\let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
|
4661 |
|
|
%
|
4662 |
|
|
% Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
|
4663 |
|
|
\removelastskip
|
4664 |
|
|
%
|
4665 |
|
|
% We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
|
4666 |
|
|
\nobreak
|
4667 |
|
|
\vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
|
4668 |
|
|
\penalty 0
|
4669 |
|
|
\vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
|
4670 |
|
|
%
|
4671 |
|
|
% Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
|
4672 |
|
|
% baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
|
4673 |
|
|
% to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
|
4674 |
|
|
% we need before each entry, but it's better.
|
4675 |
|
|
%
|
4676 |
|
|
% No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
|
4677 |
|
|
\vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
|
4678 |
|
|
\leftline{\secbf #1}%
|
4679 |
|
|
% Do our best not to break after the initial.
|
4680 |
|
|
\nobreak
|
4681 |
|
|
\vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
|
4682 |
|
|
}}
|
4683 |
|
|
|
4684 |
|
|
% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
|
4685 |
|
|
% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index
|
4686 |
|
|
% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
|
4687 |
|
|
%
|
4688 |
|
|
% A straightforward implementation would start like this:
|
4689 |
|
|
% \def\entry#1#2{...
|
4690 |
|
|
% But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
|
4691 |
|
|
% @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge---
|
4692 |
|
|
% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
|
4693 |
|
|
%
|
4694 |
|
|
% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
|
4695 |
|
|
% --kasal, 21nov03
|
4696 |
|
|
\def\entry{%
|
4697 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
4698 |
|
|
%
|
4699 |
|
|
% Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
|
4700 |
|
|
% affect previous text.
|
4701 |
|
|
\par
|
4702 |
|
|
%
|
4703 |
|
|
% Do not fill out the last line with white space.
|
4704 |
|
|
\parfillskip = 0in
|
4705 |
|
|
%
|
4706 |
|
|
% No extra space above this paragraph.
|
4707 |
|
|
\parskip = 0in
|
4708 |
|
|
%
|
4709 |
|
|
% Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
|
4710 |
|
|
\finalhyphendemerits = 0
|
4711 |
|
|
%
|
4712 |
|
|
% \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
|
4713 |
|
|
% don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
|
4714 |
|
|
% dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
|
4715 |
|
|
% indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
|
4716 |
|
|
% lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
|
4717 |
|
|
%
|
4718 |
|
|
% \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
|
4719 |
|
|
% of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
|
4720 |
|
|
\hangindent = 2em
|
4721 |
|
|
%
|
4722 |
|
|
% When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
|
4723 |
|
|
% with blank space.
|
4724 |
|
|
\rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
|
4725 |
|
|
%
|
4726 |
|
|
% A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
|
4727 |
|
|
% columns.
|
4728 |
|
|
\vskip 0pt plus1pt
|
4729 |
|
|
%
|
4730 |
|
|
% Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
|
4731 |
|
|
\afterassignment\doentry
|
4732 |
|
|
\let\temp =
|
4733 |
|
|
}
|
4734 |
|
|
\def\doentry{%
|
4735 |
|
|
\bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
|
4736 |
|
|
\noindent
|
4737 |
|
|
\aftergroup\finishentry
|
4738 |
|
|
% And now comes the text of the entry.
|
4739 |
|
|
}
|
4740 |
|
|
\def\finishentry#1{%
|
4741 |
|
|
% #1 is the page number.
|
4742 |
|
|
%
|
4743 |
|
|
% The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
|
4744 |
|
|
% there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
|
4745 |
|
|
% cursed by a Unix daemon.
|
4746 |
|
|
\setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}%
|
4747 |
|
|
\ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt
|
4748 |
|
|
\ %
|
4749 |
|
|
\else
|
4750 |
|
|
%
|
4751 |
|
|
% If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
|
4752 |
|
|
% this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
|
4753 |
|
|
% fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
|
4754 |
|
|
\hfil\penalty50
|
4755 |
|
|
\null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
|
4756 |
|
|
%
|
4757 |
|
|
% The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
|
4758 |
|
|
% part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
|
4759 |
|
|
% \hbox ensues.
|
4760 |
|
|
\ifpdf
|
4761 |
|
|
\pdfgettoks#1.%
|
4762 |
|
|
\ \the\toksA
|
4763 |
|
|
\else
|
4764 |
|
|
\ #1%
|
4765 |
|
|
\fi
|
4766 |
|
|
\fi
|
4767 |
|
|
\par
|
4768 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
4769 |
|
|
}
|
4770 |
|
|
|
4771 |
|
|
% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em.
|
4772 |
|
|
\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
|
4773 |
|
|
\hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
|
4774 |
|
|
|
4775 |
|
|
\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
|
4776 |
|
|
|
4777 |
|
|
\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
|
4778 |
|
|
\def\secondary#1#2{{%
|
4779 |
|
|
\parfillskip=0in
|
4780 |
|
|
\parskip=0in
|
4781 |
|
|
\hangindent=1in
|
4782 |
|
|
\hangafter=1
|
4783 |
|
|
\noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
|
4784 |
|
|
\ifpdf
|
4785 |
|
|
\pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
|
4786 |
|
|
\else
|
4787 |
|
|
#2
|
4788 |
|
|
\fi
|
4789 |
|
|
\par
|
4790 |
|
|
}}
|
4791 |
|
|
|
4792 |
|
|
% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
|
4793 |
|
|
% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
|
4794 |
|
|
% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
|
4795 |
|
|
\catcode`\@=11
|
4796 |
|
|
|
4797 |
|
|
\newbox\partialpage
|
4798 |
|
|
\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
|
4799 |
|
|
|
4800 |
|
|
\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
|
4801 |
|
|
% Grab any single-column material above us.
|
4802 |
|
|
\output = {%
|
4803 |
|
|
%
|
4804 |
|
|
% Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
|
4805 |
|
|
% whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
|
4806 |
|
|
% routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
|
4807 |
|
|
% essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In
|
4808 |
|
|
% that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
|
4809 |
|
|
% output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
|
4810 |
|
|
% runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case.
|
4811 |
|
|
\ifvoid\partialpage \else
|
4812 |
|
|
\onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
|
4813 |
|
|
\fi
|
4814 |
|
|
%
|
4815 |
|
|
\global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
|
4816 |
|
|
% Unvbox the main output page.
|
4817 |
|
|
\unvbox\PAGE
|
4818 |
|
|
\kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
|
4819 |
|
|
}%
|
4820 |
|
|
}%
|
4821 |
|
|
\eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
|
4822 |
|
|
%
|
4823 |
|
|
% Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
|
4824 |
|
|
\output = {\doublecolumnout}%
|
4825 |
|
|
%
|
4826 |
|
|
% Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
|
4827 |
|
|
% routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
|
4828 |
|
|
% format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
|
4829 |
|
|
% of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
|
4830 |
|
|
% execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
|
4831 |
|
|
%
|
4832 |
|
|
% First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
|
4833 |
|
|
% the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
|
4834 |
|
|
% changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
|
4835 |
|
|
% below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
|
4836 |
|
|
% as it did when we hard-coded it.
|
4837 |
|
|
%
|
4838 |
|
|
% We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
|
4839 |
|
|
% can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
|
4840 |
|
|
% been clobbered.
|
4841 |
|
|
%
|
4842 |
|
|
\doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
|
4843 |
|
|
\advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
|
4844 |
|
|
\divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
|
4845 |
|
|
\hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
|
4846 |
|
|
%
|
4847 |
|
|
% Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here,
|
4848 |
|
|
% since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
|
4849 |
|
|
\vsize = 2\vsize
|
4850 |
|
|
}
|
4851 |
|
|
|
4852 |
|
|
% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
|
4853 |
|
|
% the last.
|
4854 |
|
|
%
|
4855 |
|
|
\def\doublecolumnout{%
|
4856 |
|
|
\splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
|
4857 |
|
|
% Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
|
4858 |
|
|
% (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
|
4859 |
|
|
% previous page.
|
4860 |
|
|
\dimen@ = \vsize
|
4861 |
|
|
\divide\dimen@ by 2
|
4862 |
|
|
\advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
|
4863 |
|
|
%
|
4864 |
|
|
% box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
|
4865 |
|
|
\setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
|
4866 |
|
|
\onepageout\pagesofar
|
4867 |
|
|
\unvbox255
|
4868 |
|
|
\penalty\outputpenalty
|
4869 |
|
|
}
|
4870 |
|
|
%
|
4871 |
|
|
% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
|
4872 |
|
|
% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
|
4873 |
|
|
\def\pagesofar{%
|
4874 |
|
|
\unvbox\partialpage
|
4875 |
|
|
%
|
4876 |
|
|
\hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
|
4877 |
|
|
\wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
|
4878 |
|
|
\hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
|
4879 |
|
|
}
|
4880 |
|
|
%
|
4881 |
|
|
% All done with double columns.
|
4882 |
|
|
\def\enddoublecolumns{%
|
4883 |
|
|
% The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised
|
4884 |
|
|
% _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the
|
4885 |
|
|
% following situation:
|
4886 |
|
|
%
|
4887 |
|
|
% The last section of the index consists only of a single entry.
|
4888 |
|
|
% Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no
|
4889 |
|
|
% break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last
|
4890 |
|
|
% section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not
|
4891 |
|
|
% fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following
|
4892 |
|
|
% penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject
|
4893 |
|
|
% below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output
|
4894 |
|
|
% routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last
|
4895 |
|
|
% double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which
|
4896 |
|
|
% is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with
|
4897 |
|
|
% the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as
|
4898 |
|
|
% the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page
|
4899 |
|
|
% break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the
|
4900 |
|
|
% page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page
|
4901 |
|
|
% goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final
|
4902 |
|
|
% section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after
|
4903 |
|
|
% \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns
|
4904 |
|
|
% and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see
|
4905 |
|
|
% \pagebody), causing an overfull box.
|
4906 |
|
|
%
|
4907 |
|
|
% Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the
|
4908 |
|
|
% page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281).
|
4909 |
|
|
\penalty0
|
4910 |
|
|
%
|
4911 |
|
|
\output = {%
|
4912 |
|
|
% Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the
|
4913 |
|
|
% current page, no automatic page break.
|
4914 |
|
|
\balancecolumns
|
4915 |
|
|
%
|
4916 |
|
|
% If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
|
4917 |
|
|
% though, there will be another page break right after this \output
|
4918 |
|
|
% invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
|
4919 |
|
|
% want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
|
4920 |
|
|
% definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
|
4921 |
|
|
% called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
|
4922 |
|
|
% the output somewhat more palatable.)
|
4923 |
|
|
\global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
|
4924 |
|
|
}%
|
4925 |
|
|
\eject
|
4926 |
|
|
\endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
|
4927 |
|
|
%
|
4928 |
|
|
% \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
|
4929 |
|
|
% the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
|
4930 |
|
|
% typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
|
4931 |
|
|
% \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
|
4932 |
|
|
\pagegoal = \vsize
|
4933 |
|
|
}
|
4934 |
|
|
%
|
4935 |
|
|
% Called at the end of the double column material.
|
4936 |
|
|
\def\balancecolumns{%
|
4937 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
|
4938 |
|
|
\dimen@ = \ht0
|
4939 |
|
|
\advance\dimen@ by \topskip
|
4940 |
|
|
\advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
|
4941 |
|
|
\divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
|
4942 |
|
|
%debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
|
4943 |
|
|
\splittopskip = \topskip
|
4944 |
|
|
% Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
|
4945 |
|
|
{%
|
4946 |
|
|
\vbadness = 10000
|
4947 |
|
|
\loop
|
4948 |
|
|
\global\setbox3 = \copy0
|
4949 |
|
|
\global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
|
4950 |
|
|
\ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
|
4951 |
|
|
\global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
|
4952 |
|
|
\repeat
|
4953 |
|
|
}%
|
4954 |
|
|
%debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
|
4955 |
|
|
\setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
|
4956 |
|
|
\setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
|
4957 |
|
|
%
|
4958 |
|
|
\pagesofar
|
4959 |
|
|
}
|
4960 |
|
|
\catcode`\@ = \other
|
4961 |
|
|
|
4962 |
|
|
|
4963 |
|
|
\message{sectioning,}
|
4964 |
|
|
% Chapters, sections, etc.
|
4965 |
|
|
|
4966 |
|
|
% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course. But we count the unnumbered
|
4967 |
|
|
% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
|
4968 |
|
|
% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter
|
4969 |
|
|
% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000
|
4970 |
|
|
% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
|
4971 |
|
|
\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
|
4972 |
|
|
\newcount\chapno
|
4973 |
|
|
\newcount\secno \secno=0
|
4974 |
|
|
\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
|
4975 |
|
|
\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
|
4976 |
|
|
|
4977 |
|
|
% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
|
4978 |
|
|
\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
|
4979 |
|
|
%
|
4980 |
|
|
% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
|
4981 |
|
|
% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
|
4982 |
|
|
% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
|
4983 |
|
|
% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
|
4984 |
|
|
%
|
4985 |
|
|
\def\appendixletter{%
|
4986 |
|
|
\ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
|
4987 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
|
4988 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
|
4989 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
|
4990 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
|
4991 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
|
4992 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
|
4993 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
|
4994 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
|
4995 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
|
4996 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
|
4997 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
|
4998 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
|
4999 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
|
5000 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
|
5001 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
|
5002 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
|
5003 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
|
5004 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
|
5005 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
|
5006 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
|
5007 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
|
5008 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
|
5009 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
|
5010 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
|
5011 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
|
5012 |
|
|
% The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
|
5013 |
|
|
% expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not
|
5014 |
|
|
% expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
|
5015 |
|
|
% with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
|
5016 |
|
|
\else\char\the\appendixno
|
5017 |
|
|
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
5018 |
|
|
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
|
5019 |
|
|
|
5020 |
|
|
% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number
|
5021 |
|
|
% and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use
|
5022 |
|
|
% these. @section does likewise.
|
5023 |
|
|
\def\thischapter{}
|
5024 |
|
|
\def\thischapternum{}
|
5025 |
|
|
\def\thischaptername{}
|
5026 |
|
|
\def\thissection{}
|
5027 |
|
|
\def\thissectionnum{}
|
5028 |
|
|
\def\thissectionname{}
|
5029 |
|
|
|